WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 1 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 2 RENAULT recom m ends WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 0.02 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 4 q 0.02 Brief overview • Tyre pressures .............................................................................................. 0.04 - 0.05 • Renault Card: use ...................................................................................... 1.02 ¬ 1.09 • Child restraints .......................................................................................... 1.34 ¬ 1.45 • Warning lights (instrument panel) .......................................................... 1.50 ¬ 1.75 • Starting/stopping the engine ...................................................................... 2.02 - 2.03 • Driving ........................................................................................................ 2.02 ¬ 2.34 Tyre pressure monitor .......................................................................... 2.12 ¬ 2.17 Electronic Stability Program: ESP ........................................................ 2.18 - 2.19 Traction control system ......................................................................... 2.20 - 2.21 Emergency brake assistance ............................................................................. 2.24 Cruise control/speed limiter ................................................................ 2.25 ¬ 2.30 Parking aid ......................................................................................................... 2.31 • Heating/air conditioning ........................................................................... 3.02 ¬ 3.19 • Bonnet/maintenance .................................................................................. 4.02 ¬ 4.15 • Practical advice (replacing bulbs, fuses, breakdown, faults) ............... 5.02 ¬ 5.42 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 0.03 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 5 0.03 C O N T E N T S Sections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Getting to know your car ..................................................................... Driving ............................................................................................................... Your comfort ................................................................................................. Maintenance .................................................................................................. Practical advice ........................................................................................... Technical specifications ........................................................................ Alphabetical index .................................................................................... WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 0.04 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 6 0.04 TYRE PRESSURES (in bar or kg/cm² when cold) Saloon versions 1.6 16V - 1.8 16V 2.0 16V 2.0 IDE - 1.9 dCi 3.0 V6 1.9 dCi 2.2 dCi Type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0A - BG0B - BG0C BG0E - BG0H - BG0J BG0K - BG0L - BG0M BG0N - BG0P - BG0S BG0U - BG0V - BG0W BG00 - BG03 - BG04 BG05 - BG06 - BG08 BG0D - BG0Y BG01 - BG02 BG0G - BG0R BG07 BG0F - BG09 Non-motorway use • Front 2.0(1) 2.3 2.2 2.3(1) • Rear 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.1 Motorway use (2) • Front 2.3(1) 2.7 2.5 2.7(1) • Rear 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 Spare wheel 2.3 2.7 2.5 2.7 Wheel sizes (3) 6.5 J 15 - 6.5 J 16 - 7 J 17 Tyre sizes (3) 195/65 R 15 H - 205/55 R 16 V - 205/60 R 16 V - 225/45 R 17 V Tyre safety and use of chains Refer to the Tyres paragraph in section 5 for information on maintenance and, depending on the version, the conditions under which chains may be fitted to the vehicle. (1) Vehicles with automatic gearbox: add 0.1 bar at the front. (2) Special note concerning vehicles used at full load (maximum permissible all-up weight) and towing a trailer. The maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar. Refer to the Weights paragraph in section 6 for more details. (3) The wheel rim and tyre sizes depend on the version and country in which it is sold. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 0.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 7 q 0.05 TYRE PRESSURES (in PSI when cold) Saloon versions 1.6 16V - 1.8 16V 2.0 16V 2.0 IDE - 1.9 dCi 3.0 V6 1.9 dCi 2.2 dCi Type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0A - BG0B - BG0C BG0E - BG0H - BG0J BG0K - BG0L - BG0M BG0N - BG0P - BG0S BG0U - BG0V - BG0W BG00 - BG03 - BG04 BG05 - BG06 - BG08 BG0D - BG0Y BG01 - BG02 BG0G - BG0R BG07 BG0F - BG09 Non-motorway use • Front 29(1) 33 32 33(1) • Rear 29 30 30 30 Motorway use (2) • Front 33(1) 39 36 39(1) • Rear 32 32 32 32 Spare wheel 33 39 36 39 Wheel sizes (3) 6,5 J 15 - 6,5 J 16 - 7 J 17 Tyre sizes (3) 195/65 R 15 H - 205/55 R 16 V - 205/60 R 16 V - 225/45 R 17 V Tyre safety and use of chains Refer to the Tyres paragraph in section 5 for information on maintenance and, depending on the version, the conditions under which chains may be fitted to the vehicle. (1) Vehicles with automatic gearbox: add 0.1 bar at the front. (2) Special note concerning vehicles used at full load (maximum permissible all-up weight) and towing a trailer. The maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar. Refer to the Weights paragraph in section 6 for more details. (3) The wheel rim and tyre sizes depend on the version and country in which it is sold. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page 0.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 8 q 0.06 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.0l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 9 q 1.01 Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle RENAULT Card: general information, use, deadlocking .................................................................. 1.02 ¬ 1.09 Doors ..................................................................................................................................................... 1.10 ¬ 1.14 Engine immobiliser system ................................................................................................................... 1.15 - 1.16 Head rests - Seats ................................................................................................................................. 1.17 ¬ 1.22 Seat belts ............................................................................................................................................... 1.23 ¬ 1.26 Additional methods of restraint ......................................................................................................... 1.27 ¬ 1.33 front seat belts .................................................................................................................................. 1.27 ¬ 1.30 rear seat belts ................................................................................................................................................ 1.31 lateral ............................................................................................................................................................. 1.32 Child safety ........................................................................................................................................... 1.34 ¬ 1.45 Deactivating front passenger airbag ................................................................................................. 1.40 - 1.41 Driver’s position ................................................................................................................................... 1.46 ¬ 1.49 Instruments ........................................................................................................................................... 1.50 ¬ 1.75 Information display ......................................................................................................................... 1.66 ¬ 1.71 Trip computer ................................................................................................................................... 1.72 ¬ 1.75 Voice synthesiser ................................................................................................................................... 1.76 - 1.77 Clock and external temperature ...................................................................................................................... 1.78 Steering wheel .................................................................................................................................................. 1.79 Rear-view mirrors .................................................................................................................................. 1.80 - 1.81 Audible and visible signals ............................................................................................................................. 1.82 Lighting and external signals .............................................................................................................. 1.83 ¬ 1.85 Headlight beam adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 1.85 Wipers / washers ................................................................................................................................. 1.86 ¬ 1.88 Fuel tank (filling with fuel) .................................................................................................................. 1.89 - 1.90 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 A 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.02 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 10 q 1.02 Renault Card: general information Plip remote control Renault Card A This can be recognised by the presence of buttons 1 and 2. It allows: - openings (doors, tailgate) and the fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked (see the following pages); - depending on the vehicle, automatic closure of windows and the sunroof (see “Electric window with automatic closing” and “Sunroof” paragraphs in section 3); - operation of certain devices (e.g.: radio, electrically controlled seats...); - the engine to be started (see section 2, “Starting the engine” paragraph). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 1 L O C K + A U T O 1 8 2 4 9 . 2 LO C K + AU TO 1 3 2 B 4 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.03 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 11 1.03 Renault Card: general information (continued) Renault Card in hands free mode B This can be recognised by the presence of buttons 1, 2 and 3 It allows: - the openings (doors, tailgate) and fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked automatically if required; - openings and the fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked intentionally (see the following pages); - depending on the vehicle, automatic closure of windows and the sunroof (see “Electric window with automatic closing” and “Sunroof” paragraphs in section 3); - operation of certain devices (e.g.: radio, electrically controlled seats...); - starting the engine (see section 2, “Starting the engine” paragraph). Emergency key 4 This is only used in exceptional circumstances: it can only be used to unlock the left-hand side door (if the Renault Card battery is flat, the car battery is discharged,...). It is inserted in the Renault Card. To remove it from its mounting, pull firmly on the key. See the “Locking/unlocking the doors” paragraph in section 1 for how to use the key. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 1 L O C K + A U T O 1 8 2 4 9 5 5 B A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.04 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 12 1.04 Renault Card: general information (continued) Renault Cards A and B are supplied by a battery which should be replaced when the battery warning light 5 no longer lights up (see “Renault Card: battery” paragraph in section 5) Special note: for some vehicles, the Renault Card records settings selected by the card user: certain radio pre-sets, electrical seat adjustments (if stored), the position of the rear view mirrors, automatic air conditioning settings, etc. It is therefore recommended that you keep the same Renault Card at all times so that you can recall your personal settings. Plip remote control range This varies according to the environment. It is therefore important to take care when handling the Renault Card that you do not inadvertently lock or unlock the doors. This could lead to the engine being started or the electrical equipment being operated, for exam ple the electric windows could trap part of the body (neck, arms, hands, etc.). Risk of serious injury. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 2 LO C K + AU TO 4 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 13 1.05 RENAULT CARD: general information (continued) Special circumstances Interference may be caused by the operation of the RENAULT Card by factors in the immediate vicinity (external installations or the use of equipment operating on the same frequency as the RENAULT Card). In this case, use the emergency key 4 to open the vehicle (see the “Locking/unlocking the doors” paragraph). Replacement, need for an additional RENAULT Card If you lose your RENAULT Card or require another, you can obtain one from your Dealer. - If a RENAULT Card is replaced, it will be necessary to take the vehicle to your RENAULT Dealer because both the vehicle and all the RENAULT Cards are needed to initialise the system. - You can use up to four RENAULT cards per vehicle. - A vehicle can only have one hands-free RENAULT Card. The other RENAULT Cards are remote control cards. Faulty RENAULT Card. Make sure that the batteries are always in good condition: they have a service life of approximately two years. See the RENAULT Card: batteries paragraph in Section 5. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 14 1.06 PLIP REMOTE CONTROL RENAULT Card: use Unlocking the doors Press the unlocking button 1. The hazard warning lights flash once to indicate that the doors have been unlocked. Special note (for some countries): - The driver's door only can be opened by pressing button 1, - All the doors can be opened by pressing button 1 a second time. Locking the doors Press the locking button 2. The hazard warning lights flash twice to indicate that the doors have been locked. - If the driver's door is open or not closed properly, the doors and tailgate will not be locked and the hazard warning lights will not flash. - If one of the doors or the tailgate is open or not closed properly, the hazard warning lights will not flash. Advice Do not keep your RENAULT Card in a place where it could be bent or damaged accidentally; such as in a back pocket where you might sit on it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 1 L O C K + A U T O 1 2 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.07 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 15 1.07 RENAULT CARD IN HANDS-FREE MODE: use Hands-free mode Unlocking the doors Walk up to your vehicle carrying your Renault Card. As soon as you touch one of the handles (doors or tailgate) with your hand, the locks will open automatically. The hazard warning lights flash once to indicate that the doors have been unlocked. Locking the doors With the doors closed and carrying your Renault Card walk away from your vehicle: the doors will lock automatically. Note: the locking distance for your vehicle depends on the environment. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the side repeaters light up (for approximately ten seconds) to indicate that the doors have been locked. A beep also sounds. You can select the beep froma list of different tones or you can suppress it: consult your Renault Dealer. Special note: for vehicles not equipped with the automatic plip remote control unit door locking function (for some countries), press button 3 to lock the doors. Voluntary locking using the hands-free mode The doors and tailgate can be locked instantly by pressing button 3 and, you can check that they are locked by pulling one of the handles. Automatic mode is functional again after approximately 3 seconds. Note: - if the Renault Card is still close to the vehicle, use button 2 to lock it; - it is recommended that you use button 2 to lock the vehicle to save the battery charge if you will not be using it for some time (more than 3 weeks). Never leave your vehicle with the Renault Card still inside it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 1 L O C K + A U T O 3 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.08 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 16 1.08 RENAULT CARD IN HANDS-FREE MODE: use (continued) Operation in manual mode If you wish you can exit the hands free mode by pressing key 1 or 2: you will then be in manual mode and the Renault Card can be used following the method described in the “Plip remote control unit Renault Card: use” section. Returning to hands-free mode Press button 3 to return to hands-free mode. Interference When held close to the card, some objects can cause interference and hinder the operation of the system. Advice Do not keep your RENAULT Card in a place where it could be bent or damaged accidentally; such as in a back pocket where you might sit on it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 2 1 8 2 4 9 . 1 L O C K + A U T O 2 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 17 1.09 DEADLOCKING Deadlocking the doors and tailgate (for some countries) This allows you to lock the doors and tailgate and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example, by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside). To activate deadlocking: - press button 2 or 3 twice briefly; - press button 2 or 3 once continuously; The hazard warning lights flash four times to indicate that the doors have been locked. Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit. Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 18 1.10 OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS Opening the doors from the outside Once the doors have been unlocked using the RENAULT Card, grasp the handle 1 and pull it towards you to open the door. Opening the doors from the inside Pull handle 2. Lights on warning buzzer A warning buzzer will sound when a door is opened if you have left the lights switched on after turning off the ignition (to prevent discharge of the battery, etc). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 4 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 19 1.11 OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (continued) Child safety Vehicles fitted with switch 3 with integral indicator light Press switch 3 to prevent operation of the rear electric windows and opening of the rear doors. The indicator light built into the switch lights up to confirm that the doors are locked. If there is a fault, you will hear a beep and the indicator light will not light up. Other cases Move lever 4 on each door and check from the inside that both doors are securely locked, to make it impossible for the rear doors to be opened from inside. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 2 1 A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 20 1.12 LOCKING / UNLOCKING THE DOORS Locking/unlocking from the outside This is done using the Renault Card: see the “Renault Card” information in section 1. Special circumstance: using the emergency key 2 Remove cover A at the notch 1 (using the end of the emergency key). Insert the spare key 2 in the lock and unlock. Open the door. Faults The doors can be locked manually if there is an electrical fault. Turn screw 3 when the door is open (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) and close the door again. This is, however, locked from the exterior. It can only be opened from the inside. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 5 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 21 q 1.13 LOCKING / UNLOCKING THE DOORS (continued) Locking/unlocking from the interior Electric central locking This allows all the openings (doors, tailgate, fuel filler trap, etc.) to be controlled simultaneously. Lock them by pressing switch 4 (padlock side). The front door mechanism cannot be locked if the door is open. Opening element status indicator light With the ignition on, indicator light 5 built into switch 4 and indicator light 6 showthe locking status of the opening elements: - When the opening elements are locked, indicator lights 5 and 6 are lit up; - When the opening elements are open or not properly closed, indicator lights 5 and 6 are not lit up; With the ignition switched off, indicator light 5 remains lit up for approximately one minute and then goes out when you lock the doors using the card. If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to your vehicle in the event of an emergency. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 22 1.14 AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING WHEN DRIVING You can decide to activate this function if you wish. To activate it With the ignition on, press the central door locking button 1 on the locking side (padlock side) for approx. 5 seconds, until you hear the beep. To deactivate it With the ignition on, press the central door locking button 1 on the unlocking side (opposite the padlock) for approx. 5 seconds, until you hear the beep. If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving, remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to your vehicle in the event of an emergency. Operating principle When the vehicle moves off, the system automatically locks the doors as soon as a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) is attained. The door is unlocked - when the vehicle is stationary by opening a front door. Note: A door that is opened will automatically be locked again when the vehicle reaches a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). - by pressing the door unlocking button 1. Faults If you note a fault (no automatic locking, warning light 2 incorporated in the button 1 and warning light 3 do not light up when the doors are locked...) first check that that all the doors are closed properly. If they are closed correctly, consult your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:44 Page l.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 23 1.15 ENGINE IMMOBILISER This prevents the vehicle being driven by anyone not in possession of the vehicle's Renault Card. The vehicle is automatically protected a few seconds after the Renault Card is removed from the card reader. Any work or modification to the engine immobiliser (computer, wiring, etc.) may be dangerous. It must be carried out by trained Renault network personnel. Operating principle When the ignition is switched on, (Renault Card inserted fully in the reader) indicator light 1 lights up for a few seconds and then goes out. The vehicle has recognised the code and the engine can be started. If the vehicle does not recognise the code, indicator light 1 and the reader will flash continuously (rapid flashing) and the vehicle cannot be started. Indicator lights Vehicle protection indicator light A few seconds after the ignition has been switched off, indicator light 1 will flash continuously. The vehicle will not be protected until the Renault Card has been taken out of the card reader. Indicator light to indicate the engine immobiliser is operating When the ignition is switched on (Renault Card inserted fully), you can start the engine. Indicator light 1 lights up for a few seconds and then goes out. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 24 1.16 ENGINE IMMOBILISER (continued) Indicator light to indicate that the system is not operating correctly After the ignition has been switched on (Renault Card inserted fully), if indicator light 1 continues to flash or remains lit, this indicates that the system is not operating correctly. If the Renault Card is faulty (rapid flashing of indicator light 1 and the card reader), use the second Renault Card (delivered with the vehicle) if possible. In all cases, it is essential to consult a Renault Dealer as only he is qualified to repair the engine immobiliser. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 1 1 2 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.l7 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 25 1.17 FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS To adjust the height While sitting on the seat, pull the head restraint towards you and slide it up or down at the same time. Never lower the head restraint so far that it touches the seatback: position 2 (which acts as a stop) is the lowest permitted height. To remove the head restraint With the head restraint in the up position, press on the tab 1 to release it and pull. To adjust the angle of the head restraint After setting the height on certain vehicles the angle of the head restraint can be adjusted. To do this, move the front section Aof the head restraint forwards or backwards until it feels comfortable. To put back the head restraint Insert the rods into the sleeves, with the notches facing the front. Lower the head restraint until it locks in position. The head restraint is important for safety. Ensure that it is in place and in the correct position. The distance between your head and the head restraint should be as small as possible. The top of the head should be in line with the top of the head restraint. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.l8 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 26 q 1.18 REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS To adjust the height Pull the head rest towards you and slide it at the same time. To remove it Press tab 1. To refit the head rest Insert the rods into the sleeves, with the notches to the front, and lower the head rest to the desired height. Storage position for the rear head rests Press tab 1 and lower the head rest completely. The fully lowered position of the head rest is a storage position: it should not be used when the seat is occupied. The head restraint is important for safety. Ensure that it is in place and in the correct position. The distance between your head and the head restraint should be as small as possible. The top of the head should be in line with the top of the head restraint. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 1 4 2 3 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.l9 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 27 1.19 FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL To move forwards or backwards Lift lever 1 to unlock the seat. Release the lever in the required position and ensure that the seat is locked in place. To tilt the seatback Raise lever 2 and tilt the seatback until it is in the required position. To adjust the lumbar support of the driver’s seat Move handle 4. To adjust the height of the driver’s seat: Move lever 3 as often as necessary: - upwards to raise the seat; - downwards to lower the seat. For safety reasons, only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks excessively to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced. Make sure the seatback is locked in place correctly. Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.20 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 28 1.20 HEATED SEATS With the ignition on, press switch 1. A light lights up on the instrument panel. Even if the indicator light is lit up, the system is not necessarily activated. The system has a thermostat and only operates when the passenger compartment temperature is less than 12°C (with a tolerance of plus or minus 4°C). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.2l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:03 - page 29 1.21 FRONT SEATS WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS Switches 1 and 3 recall the stored seat positions: switch 1 is used to adjust the seat cushion and switch 3 is used to adjust the seatback. For vehicles fitted with button 2, this is used to store the chosen driving position. In this case it is possible to store a driving position using the RENAULT Card. The system operates: - with the Renault Card at accessories position (first notch); - for vehicles fitted with button 2, this system also operates whenever the driver's door is opened, for up to 40 minutes after the ignition is switched off. For safety reasons, only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. Adjusting the seat: switch 1 • To move forwards Move the switch forwards. • To move backwards Move the switch backwards. • To raise Move the rear part of the switch up. • To lower Move the rear part of the switch down. Adjusting the seatback: switch 3 • To incline the seatback Move the switch to the front or rear. We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks excessively to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced. Make sure the seatback is locked in place correctly. Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.22 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 30 1.22 DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION MEMORY It is possible to store a driving position using the Renault Card. A driving position groups together the driver’s seat adjustments and the external rear view mirror adjustments. When a driving position is stored, the seat and external rear view mirror adjustments linked to the Renault Card used are automatically recalled when the doors are unlocked and opened using the Renault Card. The system operates: - with the Renault Card at “accessories” position (first notch); - when opening the driver’s door, ignition switched off, for approximately 40 minutes. Driver’s seat memory procedure With the Renault Card fully inserted in the card reader, adjust the seat using switches 1 and 3 (see paragraph “front seats with electric control” in section 1). Press button 2 until you hear the beep: the driving position is stored. Repeat this procedure for every Renault Card. Recalling a stored position With the vehicle stopped, press briefly on button 2. Note: stored position recall is interrupted if one of the seat adjustment buttons is pressed during recall. When driving, it is possible to adjust the driving position but not to proceed to driving position recall. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.23 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 31 q 1.23 SEAT BELTS Always wear your seat belt when travelling in your car. You must also comply with the local legislation in the particular country you are in. Before driving off: - First ensure that your driving position is correct. - Then adjust your seat belt to provide maximum protection. Incorrectly adjusted seat belts may cause injuries in the event of an accident. Even pregnant women should wear a seat belt. In this case, ensure that the pressure of the lap belt on the abdomen is not excessive. Adjusting your driving position • Sit with your back firmly against the seatback. This is essential to ensure that your lumbar vertebrae are in the correct position. • Adjust the distance between the seat and the pedals. Your seat should be as far back as possible for you to be able to press in the clutch pedal fully. The seatback should be adjusted so that your arms are slightly bent when you hold the steering wheel. • Adjust the position of your head restraint. For maximum safety your head should be as near as possible to the head restraint. • Adjust the height of the seat. This adjustment allows you to select the seat position which offers you the best possible vision. • Adjust the position of the steering wheel. Adjusting the seat belts Sit with your back firmly against the seatback. The shoulder strap 1 should be as close to the base of the neck as possible but not on it. The lap strap 2 should be held firmly over the thighs and against the pelvis. The belt should be worn so that it is as close to the body as possible, i.e. avoid wearing heavy clothing or having bulky objects under the belts. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 5 6 4 6 1 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.24 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 32 1.24 SEAT BELTS (continued) Adjusting the height of the seat belt Press button 3 to select the seat belt adjustment height so that shoulder strap 1 is worn as shown above: - to lower the seat belt, push button 3 and lower the seat belt simultaneously; - to raise the seat belt, push button 3 upwards. Make sure that the seat belt is locked in position correctly after you have adjusted it. To fasten Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly and ensure the buckle 4 locks into the housing 6 (check it is locked by pulling on the buckle 4). If the belt jams before clicking, allow it to return before attempting to unwind it again. Locking (continued) If your belt becomes completely jammed: - Pull the belt slowly but firmly so that just over an inch (3 cm) unwinds. - Then allow the belt to rewind automatically. - Unwind it again. - If the problem persists, consult your Renault Dealer. Driver's seat belt not fastened warning light This lights up, and, when the car reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph or 10 km/h, it flashes and a beep sounds for 90 seconds before the light reverts to its steady lit status. To release Press button 5 on the housing 6 and the seat belt will be retracted by the inertia reel. Guide the buckle to help the operation. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 3 1 5 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.25 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 33 1.25 REAR SEAT BELTS Rear outer seat belts The belts are locked, unlocked and adjusted in the same way as the front belts. Rear centre belt Unwind the belt slowly from position 1. Fasten the black buckle 2 into the black housing 3. Fasten the last sliding buckle 4 into the red housing 5. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.26 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 34 1.26 SEAT BELTS The following information applies to both the vehicle's front and rear seat belts. • No modification may be made to the component parts of the restraint system (belts and seats and their mountings) fitted originally. For special applications (e.g. fitting child seats) consult your Renault Dealer. • Do not use devices which give any play in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely risks causing injuries in case of an accident. • Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back. • Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your knees with your seat belt around them. • The belt should never be twisted. • Following a serious accident the seat belts in use at the time must be replaced. Likewise, have your seat belts replaced as soon as they show any signs of wear. • When refitting the rear bench seat, take care that the seat belts are correctly positioned so that they can be used properly. • If necessary, readjust the position and tension of the belt. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.27 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 35 1.27 METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS These are: O buckle pretensioners, O driver's seat lapbelt pretensioner, O load limiters, O driver's and passenger front airbags. These systems are provided to act independently or together when the vehicle suffers a frontal impact. Depending on the force of the impact the system may engage: - seat belt locking; - the buckle pretensioner (which triggers to take up the seat belt play); - the lap pretensioner (for the driver’s seat), the lowvolume front airbag and the load limiter; - the large volume front airbag. Pretensioners With the ignition switched on, if there is a severe frontal impact and depending on the force of the impact, the system may engage: - piston 1 which immediately retracts the seat belt; - piston 2 on the driver’s seat. The pretensioners hold the seat belt against the body and thus increase its efficiency. • Following an accident, have the entire restraint system checked. • No operations whatsoever are permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners, airbags, computers, wiring) or use on any other vehicle, even if identical. • To avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the pretensioner and airbags system. • Testing of the electric trigger system may only be carried out by a specially trained technician using special equipment. • When the vehicle is scrapped, contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbag gas generators. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.28 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 36 1.28 METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) Load limiter Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level. Warning relating to the service life of airbags and pretensioners Pyrotechnic systems for airbags and pretensioners have a limited service life: refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle for the replacement frequency. Driver and passenger airbags An airbag may be provided for both the driver and the front passenger. An “Airbag” marking on the steering wheel and dashboard and a label in the lower section of the windscreen inform you of the presence of additional means of restraint (airbags, pretensioners, etc) in the passenger compartment. Each airbag system consists of: - An airbag and gas generator fitted on the steering wheel for the driver and in the dashboard for the front passenger. - A computer for both systems, which includes the impact sensor and a monitor controlling the electrical trigger system for the gas generator. - a single warning light on the instrument panel. The airbag system uses the principles of pyrotechnics. This explains why, when the airbag inflates, it will generate heat, produce smoke (this does not mean that a fire is about to start) and make a noise upon detonation. In a situation where an airbag is required, it must inflate immediately and this may cause some minor, superficial grazing to the skin. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.29 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 37 1.29 METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) Operation This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on. If a severe frontal impact occurs, the air bag(s) inflate(s) rapidly, cushioning the impact of the driver's head and chest against the steering wheel and the front passenger's head against the dashboard. The air bag then deflates immediately so that the passengers are not impeded in any way when they get out of the vehicle. Special feature of the front air bag There are two volumes of operation depending on the force of the impact: - “low volume” air bag, this is the first degree of operation; - “large volume” air bag, the air bag seams rip so that a larger volume of air is released into the bag (for the most forceful impacts). Faults Warning light 1 lights up on the instrument panel when the ignition is turned on and then goes out after a few seconds. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on, or lights up when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. Your protection will be reduced until this problem is rectified. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.30 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 38 q 1.30 METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) All the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the airbag inflates. Warnings concerning the driver’s airbag • Do not adjust either the steering wheel or the steering wheel cushion. • Do not cover the steering wheel cushion. • Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel cushion. • The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from the RENAULT network). • Do not sit too close to the steering wheel. If you sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on Adjusting your driving position in Section 1), you will ensure that there is sufficient space for the airbag to inflate properly and to be fully effective. Warnings concerning the passenger airbag: • Do not attach or affix any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard with adhesive near where the airbag is located A. • Nothing should be placed between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.). • The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained. As a general rule, keep all parts of the body (knees, hands, head, etc.) well away from the dashboard. • You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of the front passenger in the event of an impact. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO FIT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WHILE THE RESTRAINING METHODS ADDITIONAL TO THE PASSENGER SEAT BELT ARE NOT DEACTIVATED. (Refer to the information on Deactivation of passenger airbags in Section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.3l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 39 q 1.31 METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR OUTER SEAT BELTS These are: O Seat belt pretensioners integrated with inertia reels. O Load limiter. These systems are provided to act independently or together when the vehicle is subjected to a frontal impact. There are two possibilities, depending on the force of the impact: - protection is provided by the belt only; - the pretensioner is triggered to rectify seat belt play. Rear seat belt pretensioners This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on. If the vehicle is subject to a severe frontal impact, a piston immediately retracts the seat belt buckle pulling the seat belt tight against the body, thereby improving its efficiency. • Following an accident, have the entire restraint system checked. • No operations whatsoever are permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners, airbags, computers, wiring) or use on any other vehicle, even if identical. • To avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the pretensioner and airbags system. • Testing of the electric trigger system may only be carried out by a specially trained technician using special equipment. • When the vehicle is scrapped, contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbag gas generators. Load limiter Above a certain severity of impact, this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level. Warning relating to the service life of airbags and pretensioners Pyrotechnic systems for airbags and pretensioners have a limited service life: refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle for the replacement frequency. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B B A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.32 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 40 1.32 SIDE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Lateral airbags A These are airbags fitted to each front seat, and the rear seats in some vehicles, which are triggered on the side of the seat (door side) to protect the passengers from severe side impacts. The airbag operates through the slits in the seatbacks (door side): never put any objects in the slits. Curtain airbags B These are airbags fitted along the top of the side of the vehicle and which are triggered along the front and rear side windows to protect the passengers in the event of a severe side impact. A marking on the windowscreen informs you of the presence of additional means of restraint (airbags, pretensioners, etc) in the passenger compartment. Warnings concerning the side air bag • Fitting seat covers: Seats equipped with an airbag require special covers specifically designed for your vehicle. Consult your RENAULTDealer tofindout if these covers may be purchased from RENAULT outlets. The use of any covers other than those designed for your vehicle (and including those designed for another vehicle) may affect the operation of these airbags and reduce your protection. • Do not place any accessories, objects or even animals between the seat back, the door and the internal fittings. This may prevent the airbag from operating correctly or cause injury if the air bag is deployed. • No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the internal fittings, except by qualified RENAULT Network personnel. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.33 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 41 1.33 ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT All the warnings beloware given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the airbag inflates. The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the airbags and seat belts are integral parts of the same protection system. It is therefore essential to wear the seat belt at all times. If seat belts are not worn, it exposes the occupants to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with airbags. The airbag does not offer protection against minor and moderately serious frontal impacts, side or rear impacts or if the vehicle turns over. • No work or modification whatsoever may be performed on the entire airbag system (computer, wiring, etc.) (except by qualified RENAULT network personnel). • To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury, only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the airbag system. • As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, is stolen or broken into. • When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle. • When scrapping your vehicle, contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.34 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 42 1.34 CHILD SAFETY In all countries there are regulations governing the use of restraint systems for children and babies. In Europe children under 12 years of age or smaller than 1.50 m (1) must be seated in an approved safety device which is suitable for the weight and size of the child. The driver is responsible for ensuring that this equipment is used correctly. Child restraints for which approval was obtained after January 1992 offer a level of safety much greater than for restraints with approval before that date. It is therefore advisable to select a child restraint that complies with European regulation ECE 44. Restraints that comply with this legislation must be marked with an orange label bearing the letter E followed by a number (which stands for the country where it is type approved) and the year in which the type approval was granted. (1) Always comply with the laws of the country in which you are travelling. They may be different to the guidelines in this handbook. Remember that a collision at 30 mph (50 km/h) is the same as falling a distance of 10 metres. Expressed in other terms, transporting a child without a restraint is the equivalent of allowing him or her to play on a third-floor balcony which does not have any railings. Under no circumstances should babies or children be allowed to travel sitting on the knees of another passenger in the vehicle. If a head-on collision occurs at 30 mph (50 km/h) a child weighing 30 kg (66 lbs) will be transformed into a missile equivalent to one tonne: you will find it impossible to hold the child, even if you yourself are wearing a belt. It is particularly dangerous to put the belt round your child when he or she is sitting on your knee. Never use the belt for more than one person at the same time. The tables on the following pages inform you of the types of seat that can be fitted in each of the vehicle seat positions on the vehicle in accordance with the European directive. Before installing a child seat in the front seat (if fitting is permitted) If the passenger seat is fitted with one, carry out the following adjustments: - pull back the seat as far as possible, - straighten the seatback as much as possible, - raise the seat squab as far as possible, - pull the head rest up to its maximum position, - Set the seat belt height control to the low position. Refer to the Child safety equipment booklet available from the RENAULT Network to choose the seat suited to your child and recommended for your vehicle. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.35 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 43 1.35 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Age of child (weight of child) Vehicle without front passenger airbag inhibition Front passenger seat (3) Rear side seats Rear centre seat Birth to approximately 9 months (weight below 13 kg) X U - I X From 9 months to approximately 3 years (weight from 9 to 18 kg) X U - I (2) X From 3 years to approximately 12 years (1) (weight from 15 to 36 kg) X U (2) X X: seat not suitable for fitting a child seat of this age range. U: seat suitable for fitting a belt-fitted child seat classed as universal for this age range, check that it can be fitted. I : seat equipped with anchoring points for mounting a seat for this age range using Isofix locks, only RENAULT seats are approved. (1) A child taller than 1.50 m or weighing more than 36 kg can be strapped directly in the seat in the same way as an adult. (2) Place the back of the child seat against the seatback of the vehicle; adjust the height of the head rest or remove it if necessary. (3) DANGER RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: NEVER FIT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT TO THIS SEAT. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.36 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 44 1.36 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Age of child (weight of child) Vehicle without front passenger airbag inhibition Front passenger seat (3) (4) Rear side seats Rear centre seat Birth to approximately 9 months (weight below 13 kg) U U - I X From 9 months to approximately 3 years (weight from 9 to 18 kg) U U - I (2) X From 3 years to approximately 12 years (1) (weight from 15 to 36 kg) X U (2) X X: seat not suitable for fitting a child seat of this age range. U: seat suitable for fitting a belt-fitted child seat classed as universal for this age range, check that it can be fitted. I : seat equipped with anchoring points for mounting a seat for this age range using Isofix locks, only RENAULT seats are approved. (1) A child taller than 1.50 m or weighing more than 36 kg can be strapped directly into the seat in the same way as an adult. (2) Place the back of the child seat against the seatback of the vehicle; adjust the height of the head rest or remove it if necessary. (3) Only a rear-facing child seat may be installed in this seat; (4) DANGER RISK OF DEATH OR SEVERE INJURY: BEFORE FITTING A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT TO THIS SEAT, CHECK THAT THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. (Refer to the information on Deactivation of front passenger airbags in Section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.37 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 45 1.37 CHILD SAFETY (continued) The right choice The safety of your children is also your responsibility. To ensure that your child has the maximum possible protection, we recommend that you use seats obtained from a Renault Dealer. If your vehicle is fitted with an Isofix system you should use an Isofix seat (see section 1, paragraph “Isofix child seat attachment system”). Restraint systems for all the categories are available. These systems have been developed in consultation with the manufacturers and have been tested in Renault vehicles. Consult your Renault Dealer and ask him to help you install it. Category 0 and 0+ A child's neck is very susceptible to injury up to the age of two. In a front-facing seat there is a risk that the child will sustain neck injuries in the event of a frontal collision. Renault therefore recommends a rear-facing seat with a harness that gives all-round protection (figure 1). Category 1 Between the ages of 2 and 4, a child's pelvis is not fully developed. Restraints using the vehicle's three-point belts are not adequate and there is a risk that the child will sustain abdominal injuries in the event of a frontal collision. It is therefore advisable to use rear-facing seats (figure 1), bucket-type seats (figure 2) or seats with harnesses. Place the head restraint at the top position to allow you to press the seat back of the child seat firmly against the vehicle seat back. To avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use RENAULT approved accessories because they are suitable for your car and are the only accessories for which RENAULT will provide a warranty. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:45 Page l.38 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 46 1.38 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Category 2 (15 to 25 kg) and category 3 (22 to 36 kg) To correctly restrain the pelvis of a child up to 12 years or a height of 1.50 m, it is preferable to use seats that can be combined with the three point seat belts (figure 3) with belt guides so that the vehicle's three-point belt lies flat across the child's legs. A booster seat with a height-adjustable seatback and a belt guide are recommended as this will allow the belt to be worn as close to the base of the neck as possible but not on it. Place the head rest in the top position to allow you to press the seat back of the child seat firmly against the vehicle seat back. If a booster seat without a seatback is used, the vehicle's head rest will have to be adjusted to suit the child's stature; the upper edge of the head rest must be at the same height as the top of the child's head and should never be lower than in line with the child's eyes. The standard classifies child restraints in five categories: Category 0 : from 0 to 10 kg (0 to 22 lbs) Category 0+: from 0 to 13 kg (0 to 28 lbs) Category 1 : from 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lbs) Category 2 : from15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lbs) Category 3 : from22 to 36 kg (48 to 80 lbs) WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 5 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.39 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 47 1.39 CHILD SAFETY (continued) DANGER As front passenger airbag triggering and the position of a rear facing child seat are incompatible, it is not permitted to install such a seat in this position unless the vehicle is fitted with an airbag deactivation device. Refer to the information on deactivating the front passenger airbag. The child may suffer very serious injuries if the airbag inflates. Label A(on the dashboard) and markings B (on the sun visor) remind you of these instructions. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.40 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 48 1.40 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Deactivation of the front passenger airbag (if fitted) You must deactivate the front left-hand airbag before fitting a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. To deactivate the airbag turn off the ignition, push and turn lock 1 to the OFF position. The airbag is deactivated. With the ignition on, it is essential to check that AIRBAG OFF indicator light 2 on the dashboard is lit up. This warning light remains lit to confirmthat you can fit a child seat, as the left-hand airbag has been deactivated. Local legislation regarding the transport of children must be respected. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.4l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 49 1.41 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Activation of the front passenger airbag You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of your front passenger in the event of an impact. To reactivate the airbag turn off the ignition, push and turn lock 1 to the ON position. Switch the ignition back on, and then check that AIRBAG OFF indicator light 2, goes out. The airbag is activated. Activation or deactivation of the passenger airbag must be done with the ignition off. Six seconds after switching on the ignition, pressing lock 1 deactivates the front passenger airbag and the indicator lights up to warn you. Operating faults It is FORBIDDEN to fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the airbag activation/deactivation system is faulty. We do not recommend fitting any other kind of passenger seat device. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.42 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 50 1.42 CHILD SAFETY Isofix - mounting system for child seats This is a new procedure for installing a child seat. It can be used on the rear side seat positions of the vehicle. It consists of the following components: • Two anchoring rings per seat located between the seat the seatback; • A special RENAULT child seat fitted with two catches which hook onto the two rings. Only special RENAULT seats are approved for this vehicle. To purchase these seats, please contact your RENAULT Dealer. These seats can also be installed conventionally in other vehicles using a three-point seat belt. • Make sure that there is nothing obstructing the seat mounting mechanism at the anchorage points (gravel, rags, toys, etc.). • Always remember to fastenthe seat belts on child seats for all journeys. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.43 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 51 1.43 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Installation principle Front-facing Isofix seat When a front-facing child seat is installed, the front seat must not be moved back beyond the halfway point on the seat runners and the seatback must be in and upright position. Rear-facing Isofix seat When a rear-facing child seat is installed, the front seat must not be moved forward beyond the halfway point on the seat runners. The seat back must be close to or touching the shell of the child seat. Fitting a child seat • Before fitting and using the seat, read the instructions provided carefully; • Position the fitting guides 1 (delivered with the seat) over the openings provided in the seat squab; • Hold the seat in position so that the catches 3 on the seat are opposite the two rings 2 fitted to the rear side seats concerned. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 5 7 4 4 6 5 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.44 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 52 q 1.44 CHILD SAFETY (continued) Fitting a child seat (continued) • Latch the hooks 3 onto the rings and make sure that the seat is locked properly by moving it forwards and backwards and from right to left; • Push on the base of the seat firmly to bring it into contact with the seatback and make sure it is securely in position. Mounting the seat Each of the rear side seats is fitted with two rings for mounting the base of the child seat. Consult your Renault Dealer for howto access the rings the first time you install the seat. For the mounting ring on a front- facing seat, use belt 4 delivered with the seat: - Pass the belt 4 between the two rear head restraint rods; - Attach the catch 5 to the ring 6 located inside the luggage compartment. For the mounting ring on a rear- facing seat, use belt 4 delivered with the seat: - Slide the cover to access the ring 7; - Attach the belt catch 5 to the ring 7. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.45 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 53 1.45 CHILD SAFETY (continued) CHILD SAFETY • No modifications may be made to the component parts of the restraint system (belts and seats and their mountings) fitted originally. • Follow carefully the instructions for fitting provided by the manufacturer of the restraint system. • Always avoid dressing the child in bulky garments and do not place any objects between the child and the restraint system. • The seat belt in the vehicle must be taut so that the child's seat is held in position securely. Check the tension regularly. • Never wear the belt under the arm or behind the back. • The harness or belt should be taut and fitted to suit the child's stature. • Never allow your child to stand up or kneel on the seats while the vehicle is moving. • Check that the child is in the correct position for the entire journey, particularly when he or she is asleep. • Use the seat belts to hold the seat in position, even if it is not occupied. Otherwise, if an accident were to occur, it may become dislodged and pose a risk to other vehicle occupants. • Following a serious accident have the seat belts and restraint systems in use at the time checked. • Never leave a child unsupervised in a vehicle, even if he/she is in a restraint device. • Activate the rear door locks (if your vehicle is equipped with these). • Make sure the child does not get out of the vehicle at the side where there is traffic. • Set your children a good example - always wear your seat belt. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 27 26 25 24 23 19 18 17 22 21 20 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.46 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 54 1.46 DRIVER’S LAYOUT, LEFT-HAND DRIVE WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.47 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 55 q 1.47 DRIVER’S LAYOUT, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (continued) The equipment fitted, described below, depends on the version, option and country. 1 Lateral vent 2 Demister outlet for left-hand side window 3 Stalk for: • direction indicators • exterior lights • front fog lights • rear fog lights 4 Instruments. 5 Location for driver's airbag Horn. 6 Radio satellite controls. 7 • Stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/wipe, • Computer information scrolling control 8 Engine start/stop button. 9 Tyre pressure monitor display 10 Warning lights for: • Driver's seat belt not fastened • Door(s) open • Puncture 11 Centre air vents. 12 Clock, temperature, radio information, car phone, navigation system display, etc, depending on vehicle. 13 Radio, navigation system location, etc. Cup holder 14 Passenger airbag location. 15 Demister outlet for side window 16 Lateral vent 17 Glove box 18 Air conditioning controls 19 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 20 Handbrake 21 Switches for: • Hazard warning lights • Central door locking 22 Gear lever 23 RENAULT Card reader 24 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and depth 25 Storage compartment 26 Control for bonnet release 27 Controls for: • Electric headlight beam adjustment • Dimmer for control lighting • Cruise control and speed limiter • Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) • Voice synthesiser WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 27 26 25 21 20 19 18 17 16 24 23 22 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.48 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 56 1.48 DRIVER’S LAYOUT, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:46 Page l.49 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 57 1.49 DRIVER’S LAYOUT, RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (continued) The equipment fitted, described below, depends on the version, option and country. 1 Demister outlet for left-hand side window 2 Passenger airbag location 3 Radio, navigation system location, etc. Cup holder 4 Tyre pressure monitor display 5 Warning lights for: • Driver's seat belt not fastened reminder, • Door(s) open, • Puncture 6 Centre air vents. 7 Clock, temperature, radio information, car phone, navigation system display, etc, depending on vehicle. 8 Engine start/stop button. 9 Stalk for: • direction indicators • exterior lights • front fog lights • rear fog lights 10 Control instruments 11 Location for driver's airbag Horn. 12 Radio satellite controls. 13 • Stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/wipe, • Computer information scrolling control 14 Demister outlet for side window 15 Lateral vent 16 Controls for: • electric headlight beam adjustment • Dimmer for control lighting • Cruise control and speed limiter, • Electronic Stability Program (ESP) • Voice synthesiser. 17 Bonnet release. 18 Glove box 19 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and depth 20 Air conditioning controls 21 RENAULT Card reader 22 Handbrake 23 Controls for: • Hazard warning lights • Central door locking 24 Gear lever 25 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 26 Glove box 27 Side vent WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4a 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.50 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 58 1.50 INSTRUMENT PANEL The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.5l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:04 - page 59 1.51 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 1 Low headlight washer fluid level indicator light Top up as soon as possible. Not used Airbag warning light This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out after a few seconds. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on, or lights up when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. Rear fog light indicator light 1 Front fog light indicator light Heated seat indicator light 2 Rev counter (scale ×100) Red shaded zone, engine speed prohibited. 3 Fuel level gauge 4 Coolant temperature indicator light In normal use, the needle should be below zone 4a. Under severe conditions the needle may enter this zone. This is not serious unless warning light lights up. 5 Speedometer (km or miles per hour) 6 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and traction control indicator light There are several reasons for this warning light to come on: refer to the information on the electronic stability program (ESP) and traction control in Section 2. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4a 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.52 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 60 1.52 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.53 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 61 1.53 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 6 Tyre pressure warning light This indicator light comes on for different reasons, depending on the severity of the fault. Refer to the paragraphs on monitoring the tyre pressures in Section 2. Front passenger airbag deactivated warning light For operating information, refer to the Child safety information in Section 1. Headlight main beam indicator light Headlight dipped beam indicator light 6 Speed limiter and cruise control indicator light To understand how this operates, see the information on the Cruise control and Speed limiter in Section 2. 7 Oil level display function The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should have been switched off for some time to obtain an accurate level reading. When ignition has been switched on for approximately 30 seconds: - if the level is correct, the display will show “oil ok” (To gain a more precise indication of the level, press the trip distance recorder reset button or the information scroll button on the trip computer. The squares which appear on the display indicate the level. The number of dots displayed is reduced as the oil level drops and they are replaced by a dash. To move to on-board computer reading, press the button again). - When the level is at a minimum, the dashes and the word “oil” flash, and “OK” is no longer displayed and the SERV warning will light up. Top up the level as soon as possible. Trip computer display After 30 seconds, the display will toggle depending on the trip computer: see the “trip computer” paragraph in section 1. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4a 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.54 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 62 1.54 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.55 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 63 1.55 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 7 Reset button Press the button to reset the trip distance recorder and the on-board computer memory. 8 STOP warning light This light goes out as soon as the engine starts. It may light up alone or together with other warning lights. It indicates that it is essential to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). 9 Engine immobiliser system indicator light Refer to the information on the Engine immobiliser in Section 1. SERVICE warning light This comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out after 3 seconds. It may light up alone or together with other warning lights. If it lights up when the vehicle is being driven, it is advisable to stop at a RENAULT Dealer soon. 9 Turning left indicator light Low fuel level warning light This goes out approximately three seconds after the engine starts. If it lights up or remains lit up, fill up with fuel as soon as possible. Turning right indicator light WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4a 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.56 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 64 1.56 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:47 Page l.57 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 65 1.57 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 9 Warning light for serious injection fault/ Coolant temperature warning light •Warning light for serious injection fault If this light flashes when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the injection system Stop immediately, switch off the ignition and call a Renault Dealer. •Coolant temperature warning light If this light lights up when you are driving, it indicates engine overheating. Stop and allow the engine to run at idle speed for a minute or two. The temperature should drop. If it does not, stop the engine and check the coolant level (having let the engine cool down). Call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer if necessary. 9 Heater plugs “on” (diesel version) and electronic fault indicator light (petrol and diesel versions). •Heater plugs “on” (on diesel version) With the ignition switched on, this light should light up; it indicates that the heater plugs are switched on. It goes out after pre-heating is sufficient and the engine can be started. •Electronic fault warning light (on petrol and diesel versions) If this light lights up when you are driving, it indicates an electrical or electronic fault. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. 9 Oil pressure warning light This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out within 3 seconds. If it lights up while you are driving, stop at once and switch off the ignition and check the oil level. If this is normal, call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer. Battery charge warning light It should go out as soon as the engine starts. If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates that the circuit is overcharging or discharged. Stop and have the circuit checked. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4a 4 5 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.58 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 66 1.58 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.59 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 67 1.59 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 9 Not used. Handbrake on and brake circuit fault warning light If this lights up when braking, it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is lowor that there is a fault in the braking system. Stop and call a RENAULT Dealer. 10 Warning lights for the operation of and/or faults on the automatic gearbox. Refer to the information on automatic gearboxes in Section 2. 11 Toxic fume filter system warning light For vehicles equipped with this option, the light lights up when the ignition is switched on then goes out. • If it lights up continuously, consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible; • If it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. Refer to the information on anti-pollution, fuel economy and driving in section 2. 12 Anti-lock braking warning light This lights up when ignition is switched on, then goes out. If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system. Braking will then occur normally, without the anti-lock system. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4 5a 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 7 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.60 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 68 1.60 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.6l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 69 1.61 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 1 Not used Not used Airbag warning light This comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes off after a few seconds. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on, or lights up when the engine is running, there is a fault in the system. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. Rear fog light indicator light Front fog light indicator light 1 Handbrake on and brake circuit incident warning light If this lights up when braking, it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is lowor that there is a fault in the braking system. Stop and call a RENAULT Dealer. 2 Rev counter (scale ×100) Red shaded zone, engine speed prohibited. 3 Fuel level gauge 4 Engine immobiliser system indicator light Refer to the information on the Engine immobiliser in Section 1. 5 Coolant temperature indicator In normal use, the needle should be below the area 5a. Under severe conditions the needle may enter this area. This is not serious unless warning light lights up. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4 5a 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 7 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.62 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 70 1.62 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:48 Page l.63 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 71 1.63 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 6 Speedometer (km or miles per hour) 7 Heated seat warning light Front passenger airbag deactivated warning light For operating information, refer to the Child safety information in section 1. Headlight main beam indicator light Dipped beam headlight indicator light Speed limiter and cruise control indicator light To understand how this operates, see the Cruise control and Speed limiter paragraphs in Section 2. 8 Turning right indicator light 9 Toxic fume filter system warning light For vehicles equipped with this option, the light lights up when the ignition is switched on then goes out. • If it lights up continuously, consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible; • If it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. Refer to the information on anti-pollution, fuel economy and driving in section 2. 10 Reset button Press the button to reset the trip distance recorder and the trip computer memory. 11 Information display This display groups together several types of information. Depending on how significant the fault concerned is, it may display one or more warning lights simultaneously: see the information on the information display in Section 1. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4 5a 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 7 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.64 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 72 1.64 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If the warning light lights up, you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. If the warning light lights up, you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.65 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 73 1.65 INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 12 Oil level display function The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should have been switched off for some time beforehand to obtain an accurate level reading. When ignition has been switched on for approximately 30 seconds: - if the level is correct, the display will show “oil OK” (To gain a more precise indication of the level, press the trip distance recorder reset button or the information scroll button on the on-board computer. The squares which appear on the display indicate the level. The number of squares displayed reduces as the oil level drops and they are replaced by a dash. To move to on-board computer reading, press the button again. 12 - When the minimum oil level is reached, the dashes and the word “oil” flash, and “OK” is no longer displayed and the SERV warning light will light up. Top up the level as soon as possible. On-board computer display After 30 seconds, the display will toggle depending on the on-board computer: see the “on-board computer” paragraph in section 1. 13 Anti-lock braking warning light This lights up when ignition is switched on, then goes out. If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system. Braking will then occur normally, without the anti-lock system. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. 14 Turning left indicator light WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.66 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 74 1.66 INFORMATION DISPLAY The information display 1 groups together information messages, fault messages and warning messages. The messages appear on the information display either individually or alternately (when there are several messages to be displayed). In this event the messages are displayed in order of importance: warning messages are displayed first, then fault messages... Information messages These can either help in the vehicle operation phase, or give information on the driving selection or state. Examples of information messages are given on the following pages. Fault messages These are messages which appear in orange. They may appear individually or may alternate with the SERVICE message on the display. With the exception of the washer fluid minimum level message, they require a visit to your Renault Dealer in the near future for an operation on the vehicle. Examples of fault messages are given on the following pages. Warning messages These are red messages. They may appear alone or may alternate with the STOP message on the display. They tell you to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow) and to call your Renault Dealer. Examples of warning messages are given on the following pages. The display goes blank if the scroll button on the trip computer is moved. See trip computer information in section 1. Some warning lights are accompanied by a spoken message for vehicles fitted with a voice synthesiser (see the voice synthesiser information in section 1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.67 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 75 1.67 INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of information messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Insert card" Request to insert the Renault Card in the card reader. "Diesel Pre-heating" Pre-heating (diesel engines) "Tyre Pressure OK" Tyre pressure OK. "Speed Limiter" Speed Limiter Selection (see information on “speed limiter” in section 2) "Cruise control" Cruise Control Selection (see information on "cruise control" in section 2) WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.68 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 76 1.68 INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of fault messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Injection fault" "Automatic gearbox fault" Automatic transmission fault "Low Tyre Pressure" Low tyre pressure on one wheel: this example shows that the off-side rear tyre is slightly flat. "Sensor fault" Sensor fault: displayed, for example, when the emergency spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle (see information on tyre pressure monitoring system in section 2). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.69 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:05 - page 77 1.69 INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of fault messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "ESP off" Deactivation of the electronic stability program (ESP) and/or traction control system (see paragraphs concerned in section 2) "Screenwash". Fill up the tank as soon as possible. "Operational" Stop soon: this message may appear individually or together with one or more of the previous warning lights. It recommends that you visit your Renault Dealer soon. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.70 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 78 1.70 INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Warning messages These indicate that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow. Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Switch off limiter". Serious injection fault "Oil pressure" Oil pressure fault "Puncture" This example shows that the offside rear wheel has a puncture "Water temperature" Incorrect coolant temperature. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.7l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 79 1.71 INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Warning messages These indicate that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow. Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Battery charge fault" Battery charging fault "Low Tyre Pressure" Tyre pressure fault: this example shows that the right-hand rear wheel is very flat. "STOP" Stop Immediately: this message may appear individually or together with one or more of the previous warning lights. It indicates that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.72 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 80 1.72 TRIP COMPUTER 1 Display The location differs depending on the vehicle. Button 2 General reset and trip mileage recorder reset button To reset the trip mileage recorder, the display must show the “trip mileometer” function. Automatic zeroing The displays will be reset automatically when the maximum capacity of the memories is exceeded. Button 3 Display selection key Keep pressing key 3 briefly to show the following information in sequence: a) total mileage recorder, b) trip mileage recorder, c) fuel used, d) average consumption, e) current fuel consumption, f) estimated range, g) distance covered, h) average speed, i) mileage before oil change, j) recommended speed (speed limiter/cruise control), k) switching off the information display. Display flashing Consult a Renault Dealer. Interpreting certain values displayed after resetting The values showing average fuel consumption, range and average speed will become more stable and reliable the further you travel since the last time the reset key was pressed. For the first few miles after pressing the reset key you will notice: • that the range increases as you travel. This is normal. Average fuel consumption may decrease when: - The car stops accelerating. - The engine reaches its operating temperature (engine cold when start key pressed). - When you drive from a built up area on to the open road. Therefore, if the average fuel consumption decreases, the range will increase. • You may also notice that the average fuel consumption increases when the vehicle is stationary and the engine idling. This is normal since the module takes account of fuel used during idling. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.73 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 81 1.73 TRIP COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 Interpreting the display a) Total mileage recorder. b) Trip mileage recorder. c) Fuel used (in litres or gallons) since the last reset. d) Average consumption (in mpg and l/100 km) since the last reset. The value is displayed after driving 400 metres and takes into consideration the distance travelled and the fuel used since the last time the reset button was pressed. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.74 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 82 1.74 TRIP COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 Interpreting the display e) Current consumption (in mpg or litres/100 km) The value is displayed after reaching a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h). f) Estimated range with remaining fuel (in miles or km) This range takes into consideration the average fuel consumption since the last time the reset button was pressed. The value is displayed after driving 400 metres. g) Distance covered (in miles or km) since the last reset. h) Average speed (in mph and km/h) since the last reset. The value is displayed after driving 400 metres. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 6 8 7 4 1 6 8 7 4 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.75 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 83 q 1.75 ON-BOARD COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 Interpreting the display i) Mileage before oil change. Distance left before the next service. There are several cases: • range less than 1 000 miles (1 500 km) or next servicing date in two months. The symbol flashes (for 30 seconds if the display is not set to “mileage before oil change”, otherwise “mileage before oil change” is displayed continously) • mileage equal to 0 km or date of service reached. The symbol flashes continously regardless of the information selected on the display. Resetting the display after servicing With the ignition switched on, select the “mileage before oil change” information on the display. Press button 2 for more than five seconds. The value on the display flashes four times and is then replaced by the reset mileage before oil change value. This flashes four times. Release the pressure on button 2; the value lights up and is stored. j) Cruise control or speed limiter recommended speed (depending on vehicle) See the information on “Speed limiter” and “Cruise control” in section 2. * The driving conditions, weather conditions and road conditions may be different to those displayed by the trip computer depending on the country in which the vehicle is soldTo find out the mileage before oil change refer to the your vehicle's Servicing booklet which is the only reliable guide. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.76 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 84 1.76 VOICE SYNTHESISER The car speaks to you... The spoken information is relayed automatically and acts as a back-up for the visual information. The voice synthesiser keeps you constantly informed about the condition of the principal components of your vehicle. This information covers both precautionary and advisory information, and in certain cases one or more warning lights will light up on the instrument panel. In this case, see the “instrument panel” section. Types of spoken information The type of spoken information depends on the vehicle equipment level and monitors the following functions: - oil pressure - braking circuit - electrical circuit - engine overheating - steering column locking system - minimum fuel level - injection automatic transmission - door(s), luggage compartment, bonnet not correctly shut - lights on - handbrake on - incorrect operation of lights (side lights, brake light…) - variable power-assisted steering - washer minimum level - seat belt not fastened - engine oil minimum level - electronic stability programme (ESP) - cruise control/speed limiter - tyre pressure fault/puncture - etc. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.77 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 85 1.77 VOICE SYNTHESISER (continued) Controls connected with spoken information “Discrete” key Key 2 depressed In the “discrete” mode, the messages are replaced by a tone. If you want to hear the spoken message, press repeat key 1. “Repeat message” key Key 1 depressed Spoken information stored in the memory or present at the time of request will be repeated. If no defect is detected the spoken message will be “Welcome, the vehicle’s computer is now checking systems for you”. If you press the repeat key while a message is being spoken, it will be interrupted and the entire message repeated. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 M H nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.78 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 86 1.78 CLOCK AND EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE The time and/or external temperature are displayed when the ignition is switched on. Setting the time on the clock 1 Press: H for hours M for minutes External temperature indicator Special note: When the external temperature is between -3°C and +3°C, the °C characters flash (indicates risk of ice formation). External temperature indicator As ice formation is related to exposure, local hygrometry and temperature, the external temperature alone is not sufficient to detect ice. Vehicles fitted with navigation systems, telephones, etc. Refer to the separate instructions for the function to understand the special features of this equipment. If the electrical supply is cut (battery disconnected, feed wire broken, etc.), The clock must be reset. We advise that these settings are not made when driving. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.79 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 87 1.79 STEERING WHEEL Height and depth adjustment Lower lever 1 and place the steering wheel in the required position: lift the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. For safety reasons, only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary. Never leave the steering wheel on full lock when the vehicle is parked (as this could damage the power assisted steering pump). Never switch off the ignition when travelling downhill, and avoid doing so when driving in general (as the power steering and brake servo will not function). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS D A B C E 1 F 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.80 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 88 1.80 EXTERNAL REAR-VIEW MIRRORS External rear-view mirrors With the ignition on, turn knob 1: - Position C to adjust the left-hand rear-view mirror - Position E to adjust the right-hand rear-view mirror D is the central neutral position. Folding rear-view mirrors Move the button 1 at position F: the external rear-view mirrors fold. To reset them to driving position, return to position C, D or E. De-icing rear-view mirror The rear-view mirrors are de-iced when rear screen demisting is switched on. Autodimming rear-view mirrors These automatically darken at night if you are being followed by a vehicle with its lights on. The external rear-view mirror on the driver's side has two clearly defined zones. Zone B is what can normally be seen in a conventional rear-view mirror. For your safety, zone A increases the area you can see at the rear and to the side of your vehicle. The objects in zone A look much further away than they really are. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:49 Page l.8l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 89 1.81 REAR-VIEW MIRRORS Interior rear-view mirror This is adjustable. When driving at night, to avoid being dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle behind, lower the small lever 1 located behind the rear-view mirror. Autodimming rear-view mir- ror 2 The rear-view mirror darkens automatically at night when you are followed by a vehicle with lights (main beam headlights). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 0 1 A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:50 Page l.82 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 90 1.82 HORN AND HAZARD LIGHTS Horn Press on the steering wheel cushion A. Headlight flasher To flash your headlights, even if the lights are not in use, pull the stalk 1 towards you. Hazard warning lights Press switch 2. This switch lights up all four direction indicators simultaneously. It is to be used to warn other road users if you • are obliged to stop for any reason beyond your control in a forbidden location • are obliged to drive under particular conditions. Direction indicators Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering wheel and in the direction you are going to turn. When driving on the motorway, the steering wheel is not often turned enough to return the stalk automatically to position 0. There is an intermediate position in which the stalk may be held when changing lanes. It will return automatically to 0 when released. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 1 1 2 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:5l Page l.83 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 91 1.83 EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND SIGNALS Side lights Turn the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 3 opposite the symbol. The instrument panel will light up and the intensity may be adjusted by turning tumblewheel 2. Headlight dipped beams Turn the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 3 opposite the symbol. A light lights up on the instrument panel. Headlight main beam With the dipped beam headlights on, move the stalk towards you. When the main beam headlights are lit up, an indicator light lights up on the instrument panel. To return to the dipped headlight position, pull the stalk towards you. Switching off the lights Turn the end of stalk 1 back to its original position. “Lights on” warning buzzer A warning buzzer will sound when a front door is opened and the lights are left switched on after the ignition has been switched off (to prevent discharge of the battery). Before driving at night, check that the electrical equipment is in good condition and adjust the headlight beams (if your vehicle is not carrying its normal load). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 5 4 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:5l Page l.84 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 92 1.84 EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (continued) Front fog lights Turn the central ring of stalk 4 until the symbol appears opposite mark 5. Operation of the front fog lights depends on the external lighting selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel. Rear fog lights Turn the central ring of stalk 4 until the symbol appears opposite mark 5. Operation of the front fog lights depends on the external lighting selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel. Do not forget to switch off the rear fog light when it is no longer needed to avoid inconveniencing other road users. When the exterior lights are switched off, the front and rear fog lights will go out. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:5l Page l.85 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 93 q 1.85 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE HEADLIGHTS Command A allows the height of the beams to be adjusted in relation to the load. Turn control A down to lower the headlights and up to raise them. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 C D B A nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:52 Page l.86 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 94 1.86 WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE Vehicle fitted with intermittent windscreen wiper With the ignition on, turn handle 1 • A off • B intermittent wiping The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. It is possible to vary the time between sweeps by turning the central ring on the stalk switch 1. • C continuous slow wiping • D continuous fast wiping Vehicle fitted with windscreen wiper with rain sensor With the ignition on, turn handle 1 • A off • B “rain sensor” position When this position is selected, the systemdetects the presence of water on the windscreen and triggers wiping at a suitable wiping speed. • C continuous slow wiping • D continuous fast wiping Each time the ignition is switched off, it is vital that you return to the park position A to return to the rain sensor position. Vehicles with automatic selection of wiping speed If a wiping speed is selected when driving, the wiping speed is reduced to a lower speed when the vehicle stops: • from fast wiping speed the speed will change to normal wiping speed; • from normal wiping speed the speed will change to intermittent wiping. As soon as the vehicle moves off, wiping will return to the speed originally selected. When the vehicle is stationary: If stalk switch 1 is operated, it overrides and cancels automatic operation. Note: If for any reason the wipers cannot move (e.g. stuck to windscreen by ice), the system will automatically cut off the power supply to the wipers. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:52 Page l.87 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 95 1.87 WINDSCREEN WASHER / WIPER (continued) Windscreen washer, headlight washers With the ignition on, pull the stalk 1 towards you. • Car lights off The windscreen washer will be activated. • Car lights on The headlight washers will be activated at the same time. In frosty weather, make sure the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating). Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year). If you switch off the ignition before switching off the windscreen wiper (position A) the blades will stop anywhere on the windscreen. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:52 Page l.88 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 96 1.88 REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE Rear screen wiper with timer With the ignition on, move the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 2 opposite the symbol. Rear screen wash/wipe With the ignition on, move the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 2 opposite the symbol. When the stalk is released, it returns to the rear wiping position. Special note The rear screen is wiped once if reverse gear is selected when the windscreen wipers are in operation. In frosty weather, make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating). Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year). The rear screen wiper arm cannot be completely removed: if you have to extend them to clean the rear screen for example, extend them fully and keep them in that position for as long as necessary. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 1 nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:52 Page l.89 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 97 1.89 FUEL TANK Useful capacity of fuel tank: Approx. 70 litres (15.4 gallons). To open the flap A, press the hinge to open it. There is a cap holder 1 on the fuel filler flap for holding the cap when filling the tank. Fuel filler cap: this is of a special type. If you have to change it, make sure the newcap is of the same type. Consult your Renault Dealer. Never handle the cap near a source of heat or a flame. Fuel grade Petrol version Use fuel which corresponds to the appropriate octane rating as defined by the particular standards in force in each country. See “Engine Specifications”. Diesel version Use diesel engine fuel (DERV) only. Make sure that no water enters the fuel tank accidentally during filling. The fuel filler cap and neck must be clean and dust-free. The diesel fuel must be high quality. Rapeseed oil must not be used under any circumstances. Also, do not mix even small amounts of petrol with diesel. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_Gl.qxd 29/05/02 8:52 Page l.90 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T1.WIN 30/7/2002 15:06 - page 98 1.90 FUEL TANK (continued) Filling with fuel Petrol versions Only use unleaded petrol. Using leaded petrol will damage the anti-pollution system and may lead to a loss of warranty. To ensure the fuel tank is not filled with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler neck contains a restrictor fitted with a valve which only allows the nozzle for unleaded petrol to be used (at the pump). - Insert the nozzle as far as it will go and so as to open the valve. - Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation. Filling with fuel (continued) Petrol and diesel versions No more than two filling operations may be made after the fuel feed has switched off automatically for the first time because there must be sufficient space in the fuel tank to allow for expansion. Any operation or modification on the fuel supply system (computers, wiring, fuel circuit, injector, protective covers...) is strictly forbidden due to the safety risks it may cause (except for qualified staff from the Renault network. Persistent fuel odour Your vehicle has a pressurised fuel supply circuit. If a persistent fuel odour appears you should: • stop the vehicle if traffic conditions allow and switch off the ignition; • switch on the hazard warning lights and ask your passengers to leave the vehicle and stay clear of the traffic; • do not operate on or restart the vehicle before it has been inspected by qualified staff from the Renault network. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.0l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 1 2.01 Section 2: Driving (Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment) Running in / Ignition switch ........................................................................................................................... 2.02 Starting and stopping the engine ........................................................................................................ 2.02 - 2.03 Special features of petrol versions .................................................................................................................. 2.04 Special features of diesel versions .................................................................................................................. 2.05 Gear lever ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.06 Power assisted steering ................................................................................................................................... 2.07 Handbrake ......................................................................................................................................................... 2.07 Advice on anti-pollution and how to economise on fuel .............................................................. 2.08 ¬ 2.10 Environment .................................................................................................................................................... 2.11 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...................................................................................................... 2.12 ¬ 2.17 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..................................................................................................... 2.18 - 2.19 Traction control system ........................................................................................................................ 2.20 - 2.21 Anti-lock brake system: ABS ............................................................................................................... 2.22 - 2.23 Emergency braking assistance ........................................................................................................................ 2.24 Speed limiter ....................................................................................................................................... 2.25 ¬ 2.27 Cruise control ...................................................................................................................................... 2.28 ¬ 2.30 Parking aid ....................................................................................................................................................... 2.31 Using the automatic gearbox ............................................................................................................. 2.32 ¬ 2.34 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 A 1 A nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.02 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 2 q 2.02 RUNNING IN STARTING THE ENGINE O Petrol version For the first 625 miles (1000 km) do not exceed 70 mph (130 km/h) in the highest gear or 3000 to 3500 rpm. On completion of 625 miles (1000 km) you may use your car normally. However, it is only after 1500 miles (3000 km) have been covered that you may reasonably expect full performance. Service intervals: see the vehicle's servicing booklet. O Diesel version For the first 750 miles (1500 km), do not exceed 2500 rpm. On completion of this mileage you may drive faster, however, the car will only provide top performance after approximately 4000 miles (6000 km). During the running in period, do not accelerate hard while the engine is still cold and do not let the engine rev in the lower gears. Service intervals: see the vehicle's servicing booklet. When the door is opened, the Renault Card reader 1 lights up. Insert the Renault Card in the card reader 1 which has two positions: the first corresponds to the “accessories” position and the second to the “starting the engine” position. For top of the range versions a message “insert card” will appear on the instrument panel information display. “Accessories” position (First position) The accessories (radio...) operate when the engine is not running. “Starting the engine” position (Second position) Once the Renault Card is fully inserted in the card reader 1 (when you hear the unlocking noise from the steering column), button 2 lights up to confirm authorisation to start the engine: press briefly on button 2 to start. Indicator light Alights up to confirm that the engine is running. Note: button 2 is not lit if you are not in the starting condition (for example: diesel pre-heating, gear selected...). Special circumstance In some cases it will be necessary to move the steering wheel while pressing button 2 to unlock the steering column. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.03 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 3 2.03 STARTING THE ENGINE (continued) / STOPPING THE ENGINE “Starting the engine” position (continued) For diesel versions, wait until the pre-heating indicator light on the instrument panel has gone out before pushing button 2. Once the engine starts, button 2 goes out and the “engine running” indicator light A lights up (the Renault Card is then locked in the card reader which goes out). Stopping the engine Once the vehicle is stationary, press briefly on button 2: the ignition is switched off and the “engine running” indicator light A goes out. On some vehicles with automatic transmission, shift the lever to the park position P. Remove the card from the card reader 1. When you remove the card from the card reader, the courtesy lights will light up (if these are set to “automatic lighting up”); the steering column will lock and the accessories will switch off. Note: a beep will let you know if you have left the card in the card reader when you open the driver's door, and the card reader will flash as a warning. Special circumstances The “engine emergency stop” fuse in the engine compartment may be used if the engine cannot be stopped. Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” paragraph in section 5. If there is a child (or animal) in the vehicle, never leave it unattended with the Renault Card inserted in the reader. He or she could start the engine or operate electrical equipment such as the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be injured (by trapping his or her neck, arm, hand, etc.). Risk of serious injury. Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine has stopped, the power steering, brake servo and the passive safety devices such as air bags and pretensioners will no longer operate. When the Renault Card is removed the steering will lock. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.04 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 4 2.04 SPECIAL POINTS - PETROL VERSIONS The following operating conditions: • Driving for a long time with the low fuel level warning light lit up • Using leaded petrol • Using lubrication additives or fuel which is not approved by Renault Or faults such as: • faulty ignition, running out of fuel or spark plug disconnected indicated by the engine misfiring and snatching when driving • loss of power may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and thus reduce its efficiency or even destroy it and cause heat damage to the vehicle If you note any of the above faults, have the necessary repairs carried out as soon as possible by your Renault Dealer. These faults may be avoided by taking your vehicle regularly to your Renault Dealer at the intervals specified in your Servicing booklet. Starting problems To avoid damaging the catalytic converter, do not keep trying to start the engine (using the ignition key, or by pushing or towing the vehicle) without having identified and corrected the starting fault. If the fault cannot be identified, do not persist in attempting to start the engine and call a Renault Dealer. Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible substances or materials such as grass or leaves can come into contact with a hot exhaust system. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 5 2.05 SPECIAL POINTS - DIESEL VERSIONS Diesel engine speed Diesel engines are fitted with injection equipment which prevents overrevving of the engine irrespective of the gear in use. Lack of fuel After filling the tank if you have run completely out of fuel, on condition that the battery is fully charged, the engine may be started normally: see the information on the fuel tank in section 1 to find out more about the special features of diesel versions fitted with common-rail (high pressure) injection. However, if after a few seconds and several attempts the engine fails to start, contact a Renault Dealer. Precautions to be taken in winter To avoid any damage in icy weather: • Ensure the battery is always fully charged. • Always keep the fuel tank relatively full to avoid water vapour condensing in it and accumulating at the bottom of the tank. Vehicles with diesel fuel heater This equipment enables diesel fuel to be used with no additives down to –18°C or, if the vehicle is used regularly over short distances (cold engine), down to –5°C. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 6 2.06 GEAR LEVER To select reverse gear With the vehicle stationary, move the gear selector lever into neutral then into reverse. Vehicle with manual gearbox: depending on the vehicle, follow the grid drawn on knob 1 and, depending on the vehicle, lift ring 2 against the gear lever to select reverse. The reversing lights will light up as soon as reverse gear is selected, with ignition on. Vehicle fitted with parking aid: see the information on the parking aid in section 2 to find out more about the special features. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.07 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 7 2.07 HANDBRAKE POWER ASSISTED STEERING To release: Pull the lever up slightly, press button 1 and then lower the lever to the floor. The red warning light on the instrument panel will light up if you are driving with an incorrectly released handbrake. To apply Pull the lever up. The lever should travel about 10 notches to hold the vehicle. Your vehicle is fitted with self-adjusting rear brake shoes and the handbrake should only be adjusted during a brake overhaul. When the vehicle is stationary, make sure that the handbrake is properly applied so that the vehicle does not move unintentionally. Make sure the handbrake is properly released when driving, otherwise overheating may occur. When power assisted steering is fitted, never leave the steering wheel on full lock when the vehicle is parked as this may damage the pump. Variable power assisted steering The variable power assisted steering system is equipped with an electronic control system which alters the level of assistance to suit the vehicle speed. Steering is easier during parking manoeuvres (for added comfort) whilst the force rises progressively as speed increases (for enhanced safety at high speeds). Never switch off the ignition when travelling downhill, and avoid doing so when driving in general (power steering and brake servo will not function). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.08 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 8 2.08 ADVICE ON ANTI-POLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL, DRIVING RENAULT is actively participating in the reduction of pollutant exhaust gas emissions and in saving energy. By virtue of its design, moderate fuel consumption and initial settings, your Renault conforms to current anti-pollution standards. Technical design, however, cannot achieve all. The fuel consumption of your car and the level of pollutant exhaust gas emissions are very much within your control. Make sure that your vehicle is maintained correctly, use it carefully and watch your driving style. Maintenance It should be noted that failure to respect anti-pollution standards may lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner. In addition, the replacement of parts of the engine, fuel supply system and exhaust by parts other than those originally recommended by the manufacturer may alter your vehicle such that it no longer complies with anti-pollution standards. Have your vehicle checked and adjusted by your Renault Dealer in accordance with the instructions in the vehicle’s servicing booklet. Your Renault Dealer has all the equipment necessary for ensuring that your vehicle is maintained to its original standard. Always remember that the emission of pollutant fumes is directly linked to fuel consumption. Engine adjustments • Ignition: This does not require adjustment. • Spark plugs: Optimum conditions of use, performance and output demand that the specifications laid down by our design office be rigorously adhered to. If the spark plugs have to be changed, use the make, type and gap specified for your vehicle's engine. Consult your Renault Dealer for this information. • Idling speed: This does not require adjustment. • Air filter, diesel filter: A clogged element hinders output and must be changed. • Injection pump setting: It must be set to the recommended values. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 9 2.09 ADVICE ON ANTIPOLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL, DRIVING (continued) Monitoring exhaust gas The exhaust gas monitoring system will detect any malfunctioning of the vehicle's exhaust gas depollution system. If this system malfunctions, toxic substances may be released into the atmosphere or mechanical damage may occur. This warning light on the instrument panel will indicate if there are any problems with the system: This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out after 3 seconds. - If it lights up continuously, consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. - If it flashes, reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. Driving •Drive carefully for the first few miles until the engine reaches its normal operating temperature, rather than let it warm up while the car is stationary. •Speed is expensive. •“Sporty” driving uses a lot of fuel: drive with a “light right foot”. •Brake as little as possible by suitably anticipating an obstacle or bend and then simply lifting the accelerator pedal. •Avoid fierce acceleration. •Do not overrev the engine in the intermediate gears. Always use the highest ratio possible without labouring the engine. On versions with automatic transmission, it is preferable to keep the gear lever in position “D”. •Do not try to maintain the same speed up a hill; accelerate no more than you would on the level. Keep your foot in the same position on the accelerator pedal. •Double declutching and accelerating before switching off are superfluous actions in modern cars. •Bad weather, flooded roads Do not drive through floods if the depth of water is above the lower edge of the wheel rims. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l0 Page 2.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 10 2.10 ADVICE ON ANTIPOLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL, DRIVING (continued) General hints • Electricity is “fuel”; switch off all the electrical units which are not really needed. However, (with safety always in mind), keep your lights on when the visibility is bad (“see and be seen”). • Try to use the air vents. Driving with the windows open at 100 km/h will increase fuel consumption by +4%. • For vehicles with air conditioning, the extra fuel consumed in urban cycle can be as high as 2 litres per 100 km: switch the system off when it is not needed. • Never fill the fuel tank right to the brim as this is wasteful. • Do not leave an empty roof rack in position. • It is better to fit a trailer for bulky objects. • When towing a caravan, fit a wind deflector and adjust it carefully. • Avoid using the car for door-to-door calls (short journeys with long waits in between) because the engine never reaches its normal operating temperature. Try to group your calls. Tyres • Pressures which are too low may increase fuel consumption. • The use of non-recommended tyres may also increase fuel consumption. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 11 2.11 ENVIRONMENT Parts which can be recycled Recycled parts Your vehicle has been designed with the aim of caring for the environment. • The majority of versions are equipped with a depollution system including a catalytic converter, a lambda sensor and an active carbon filter. (The active carbon filter prevents vapour from the petrol tank being released into the open air.) • RENAULT has implemented all its knowledge of recycling to keep damage to the environment to a minimum to benefit the service life of your vehicle. • Your vehicle comprises 90 % recyclable parts or materials and already contains numerous parts in plastic or recycled materials (see drawing above). All the plastic components have been marked to make it easier to identify them for recycling. • To help protect the environment, your the paint and brake pads on your vehicle are unleaded and do not contain cadmium. We have also reduced the quantity of chlorine by 40 % in relation to previous models. Make your contribution towards protection of the environment too. Do not dispose of parts worn and replaced in the course of routine vehicle maintenance (battery, cells, oil filter, air filter...) and oil cans (empty or filled with oil ..) with household waste. Dispose of them through specialist organisations. In all cases, comply with local legislation. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 12 2.12 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM This system continuously monitors the tyre pressures. Tyre pressures should be adjusted when the tyres are cold. If tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, assume an increase of 0.2 to 0.3 bar. Never deflate a hot tyre. This function is an additional driving aid. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. It cannot, therefore, under any circumstances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver. Check the tyre pressures, including the emergency spare wheel, once a month. Operating principle Each wheel (except the emergency spare wheel) has a sensor, integrated in the inflation valve which periodically measures the tyre pressure. The driver is constantly informed of the correct tyre pressure and possible variations on display A. For certain vehicles, the information display B supplements this information by specifying the tyre pressures when ignition is switched on (for approximately 20 seconds) or if there is a fault when driving. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 D C E F 2 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 13 2.13 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Non-interchangeability of wheels Each of the sensors integrated in the valve 1 is devoted to one single wheel: under no circumstances should you swap the wheels. There is a risk of false information leading to serious consequences. To mark the correct position of the wheel, see the colour of the ring 2 (after cleaning, if necessary) which surrounds each valve: - C : yellow ring - D : black ring - E : red ring - F : green ring Fitting tyres (replacing tyres or fitting winter tyres) As there are special precautions to be taken when replacing tyres, we advise you to consult your Renault Dealer. Reading the tyre pressures on the instrument panel (if fitted) After the vehicle's tyre pressures have been checked, warning messages on the instrument panel and/or values read on the information display B are updated once you exceed 12 mph (25 km/h). The operating pressure gauges show the pressure measurement variances (known as tolerance). The pressure which is displayed on the information display B may therefore be different from the pressure read on the pressure gauge used. The pressure displayed on the information display should be used. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS B A nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 14 2.14 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Spare wheel The emergency spare wheel does not have a sensor and is thus not detected by the system. When it is fitted in the place of another wheel, the system detects a fault. Replacing wheels / rims... This system requires special equipment (wheels, hubcaps, etc.). Consult your Renault Dealer to find out which accessories are compatible with the system and which are available from Renault accessory outlets: use of any other accessory may impair the operation of the system. Tyre repair aerosols As a result of the special wheels, only products approved by Renault's Technical Department may be used. Display The display A and, depending on the vehicle, the warning lights on the instrument panel or the information display B give information on possible faults (flat tyre, punctured tyre, system out of service, etc.). The following pages show the breakdown of the illumination of various warning lights for: - vehicles fitted only with display A; - vehicles fitted with display A and information display B. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:04 - page 15 2.15 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted only with display A Examples of illumination of warning lights on the instrument panel and display flashing + steady light + faulty wheel(s) flashing Meaning: the flashing wheel is slight flat or over-inflated, check the tyre pressures. flashing + steady light + faulty wheel(s) flashing Meaning: the flashing wheel is very flat, stop as soon as possible and check the tyre pressures. flashing + steady light + steady light + faulty wheel(s) flashing Meaning: puncture, replace the wheel concerned or call your Renault Dealer. steady light + faulty wheel(s) not lit up Meaning: System fault (if, for example, the emergency spare wheel is fitted or winter tyres are fitted...). lit up Meaning: Driving speed is not suited to the tyre pressures. Slow down or inflate the tyres to the full load pressure (see the “tyre pressures” table). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 16 2.16 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted with display A and information display B. Examples of information which may be displayed on the display A and the information display B. Display A Information display B Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Tyre pressure OK" The tyre pressure is correct. "Check tyre pressure" the flashing wheel is slightly flat or over-inflated, check the tyre pressures. "Low Tyre Pressure" The flashing wheel is flat or over-inflated, slow down and check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. "Tyre pressure" Driving speed is not suited to the tyre pressure. Slow down or inflate the tyres to the full load pressure (see the “tyre pressures” table). "Sensor fault" System fault (if, for example, the emergency spare wheel is fitted or winter tyres are fitted...). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l7 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 17 2.17 TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted with display A and information display B. Examples of information which may be displayed on the display A and the information display B. Display A Information display B Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Message interpretation "Low tyre pressure" The flashing wheel is very flat, stop as soon as possible to check the tyre pressures or call your Renault Dealer "Puncture" Replace the wheel concerned or call your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l8 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 18 q 2.18 ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM: ESP This system helps you to keep control of the vehicle in “critical” driving conditions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip in a bend...). This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. It can, thus, under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). Operating principle A sensor in the steering wheel detects the path selected by the driver. Other sensors throughout the vehicle measure the actual path. The system compares the path selected by the driver and the actual vehicle path and corrects this as necessary by applying the brakes selectively and/or acting on the engine power. When the function is in operation, indicator light 1 flashes or ESP message A (depending on the vehicle) lights up. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 C D B 1 3 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:ll Page 2.l9 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 19 2.19 ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM: ESP (continued) Disabling the function The function is deactivated by pressing on button 2 and indicator light 1 or message B “ESP off” (depending on vehicle) will light up to confirm this. This action also deactivates the traction control mechanism: see the information on the traction control system in section 2. As the ESP offers additional safety, it is recommended that you do not drive when the function is disabled. Correct this as soon as possible by pressing button 2 again. Note: ESP is automatically reactivated when the ignition is switched on. Faults If the system detects a fault, there are two illumination possibilities on the instrument panel (depending on vehicle): - warning lights 1 and 3 light up; - the information display alternates between the two C“ESP fault” and D “Operational”. In both cases, consult your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l2 Page 2.20 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 20 2.20 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM This system helps to limit skidding on drive wheels and to control the vehicle when pulling away or accelerating. This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. It can, thus, under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). Operating principle The system uses sensors in the wheels to constantly measure and compare the speed of the drive wheels and prevents themspinning. If a wheel is tending to skid, the system brakes automatically until the drive delivered becomes compatible with the level of grip. The system also adjusts the engine speed to the grip available under the wheels, independently of the force applied to the accelerator pedal. When the function is in operation, indicator light 1 flashes or ESP message A lights up (depending on the vehicle). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 C D B 1 1 3 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l2 Page 2.2l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 21 2.21 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (continued) Disabling the function In some situations (driving on very wet ground: snow, mud,... or driving with chained wheels), the system may reduce the engine power to limit skidding. If this is not required, it is possible to deactivate the function by pressing switch 2. Warning light 1 or message B “ESP OFF” (depending on the vehicle) lights up. Disabling the traction control function also deactivates the ESP function: refer to the information on the ESP path control in section 2. Correct this as soon as possible by pressing switch 2 again. Note: traction control is automatically reactivated when the ignition is switched on. Faults If the system detects a fault, there are two illumination possibilities on the instrument panel (depending on vehicle): - warning lights 1 and 3 light up; - the information display alternates between the two messages C “ESP fault” and D “Operational”. In both cases, consult your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l2 Page 2.22 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 22 2.22 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM: ABS When braking sharply, the two main aims are to reduce the stopping distance and keep your vehicle under control. However, there is a risk that road holding and directional control may be lost and the wheels may lock when braking, depending on the nature of the ground, weather conditions and your reactions. The anti-lock braking system (ABS) has been designed to combat this danger. The safety enhancement is that the brake control system prevents the wheels from locking, even if the brakes are applied too sharply, and allows the vehicle to be steered and thus its direction to be controlled. Under these circumstances it is quite possible for the driver to steer the vehicle and to avoid an obstacle whilst at the same time applying the brake. This system also allows you to optimise stopping distances when the adhesion of one or more wheels becomes hazardous (wet roads, slippery or varying road surfaces). Although this system allows you to make maximum use of stopping distances, even with the ABS you still have to take account of the actual condition of the road surface. It is still essential to follow the rules of good driving practice (such as driving at a safe distance to the vehicle in front). The fact that the vehicle’s safety has been increased should not encourage you to take risks. When the system has been activated, you will feel a certain degree of pulsation at the brake pedal. These tangible signs will warn you that the adhesion between the tyres and the ground has reached its limit and enable you to adapt your driving style to suit the road conditions. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l2 Page 2.23 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 23 2.23 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM: ABS (continued) Two situations must be considered if there is a fault in the ABS system 1 - The orange warning light is lit up on the instrument panel. The braking system operates in the same way as for a vehicle not equipped with an ABS system. Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. 2 - The orange warning light and the red brake circuit fault indicator light are lit up on the instrument panel. This indicates that both the braking system and the ABS system are faulty. Your vehicle brakes may still partially operate. However, it is dangerous to brake suddenly and it is essential to stop immediately, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Contact your Renault Dealer as a matter or urgency. The braking control provided by the anti-lock braking system is independent of the effort applied to the brake pedal. In an emergency, apply continuous pressure to the brake pedal - there is no need to pump it repeatedly. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l2 Page 2.24 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 24 2.24 EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSISTANCE This is a system in addition to ABS which helps reduce the vehicle stopping distances. Operating principle The system detects an emergency braking situation by means of a sensor which measures the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. In this case, braking assistance instantly reaches its maximum power and allows ABS regulation to be reached as quickly as possible. ABS braking is maintained as long as the brake pedal is not released. Illumination of hazard warning lights These may light up in the event of rapid deceleration. This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. It can, thus, under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 5 3 4 6 7 1 6 8 7 4 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l3 Page 2.25 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 25 2.25 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: limiter function The speed limiter function allows you to decide on a maximum driving speed. This may be useful, for example, in town driving or in areas with speed restriction (roadworks), etc. The systemoperates above a driving speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Controls 1 Main “On/Off” switch 2 Limited speed initiating switch and adjustment of limited speed (increasing). 3 Return to stored limited speed. 4 Switching the function off (with stored limited speed) 5 Limited speed initiating switch and adjustment of limited speed (decreasing). Indicator light This orange indicator light lights up on the instrument panel to indicate that the limiter function is in operation. Depending on the vehicle, information on the speed stored appears on the instrument panel: either in the on-board computer 6 or the information display 7 “Speed limiter”. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 5 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l3 Page 2.26 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 26 2.26 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: limiter function (continued) Switching on Push side switch 1. The indicator light lights up on the instrument panel and, depending on the vehicle, the on-board computer or the information display shifts into “speed limiter” operation. Limiting the speed At a stable speed (approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h) and in the correct gear (for vehicles with manual gearboxes), press switch 2: the speed is stored. Driving When a limited speed is stored, press on the accelerator pedal until you reach the limited speed. From this point, no effort on the accelerator pedal will allow you to exceed the programmed speed except in an emergency (see information on “exceeding the limited speed”). Changing the limited speed The limited speed may be changed by acting (pressing frequently or continuously) on: - key 2 to increase speed, - key 5 to reduce speed, WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 4 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l3 Page 2.27 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 27 2.27 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: limiter function (continued) Exceeding the limited speed In the event of an emergency It is possible to exceed the limited speed at any moment. To do this: depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (beyond the “point of resistance”). The speed flashes on the instrument panel (information display or on-board computer) to inform you that the limited speed is being exceeded. When the emergency has passed, release the accelerator pedal: the speed limiter function will return as soon as you reach a speed lower than the limited speed before the emergency. Impossible to operate at the limited speed If the limited speed cannot be maintained by the system (for example in the event of a steep incline), the speed will flash on the instrument panel (information display or on-board computer). Switching the function off The speed limiter function is interrupted when you press: - key 4, in this case the limited speed remains stored - key 1, in this case the limited speed is no longer stored. Confirmation that the function has been switched off is given when the indicator light on the instrument panel goes out. Return to limited speed. It is possible to return to a speed stored by pressing key 3. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 4 2 5 6 7 1 6 8 7 4 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l4 Page 2.28 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 28 2.28 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: cruising function When road conditions permit (fluid or motorway traffic), the cruise control allows you to take your foot off the accelerator while your car continues to cruise at the speed you have selected. This is called the “cruising speed”. This cruising speed may be set at any speed at speeds of 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. Controls 1 Main “On/Off” switch 2 Cruising speed storage switch and adjustment of limited speed (increasing) 3 Return to stored cruising speed 4 Switching the function off (with stored cruising speed) 5 Cruising speed storage switch and adjustment of limited speed (decreasing) Indicator light This green indicator light lights up on the instrument panel to indicate that the cruising function is in operation. Depending on the vehicle, information on the speed stored appears on the instrument panel: either in the on-board computer 6 or the information display 7 “Speed limiter”. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 5 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l4 Page 2.29 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 29 2.29 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: cruising function (continued) Switching on Press side switch 1 The indicator light lights up in the instrument panel and, depending on the vehicle, the on-board computer or the information display enters “cruise control” mode. Activating cruise control At a stable speed (approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h) and in the correct gear (for vehicles with manual gearboxes), press switch 2: the speed is stored. Driving When a cruise control speed is stored you can lift your foot off the accelerator pedal. Changing the cruise control speed The cruise control speed may be changed by acting (pressing repeatedly or continuously) on: - key 2 to increase speed, - key 5 to reduce speed. Exceeding the cruise control speed In the event of an emergency The cruise control speed may be exceeded at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. The speed flashes on the instrument panel (information display or trip computer) to inform you that the cruise control speed is being exceeded. When the emergency has passed, release the accelerator pedal: your vehicle will automatically return to the speed previously selected and the indicator light will go out. Impossible to operate at the speed selected If the cruise control speed cannot be maintained by the system (for example in the event of a steep slope), the speed will flash on the instrument panel (information display or trip computer). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 4 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l5 Page 2.30 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 30 2.30 CRUISE CONTROL - SPEED LIMITER: cruising function (continued) Switching the function off The function is switched off when you: - press the brake pedal. - depress the clutch pedal or shift to neutral for vehicles with automatic transmission, - Press key 4, in this case the selected speed remains stored - Press key 1, in this case the selected speed is no longer stored. Confirmation that the function has been switched off is given when the indicator light on the instrument panel goes out. Return to cruising speed A stored speed can be recalled by pressing key 3 if you are driving at a speed of approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h. This function is an additional aid to driving. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. Under no circumstances should it replace observation of speed limits nor vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l5 Page 2.3l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 31 2.31 PARKING AID Operating principle Proximity sensors located in the rear bumper “measure” the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle when reversing. This measurement is indicated by sonic beeps which become more frequent the closer you become to the vehicle, until they become a continuous beep when the obstacle is approximately 25 centimetres from the vehicle. Note: make sure that the proximity sensors are not blocked (dirt, mud, snow, etc.). Towing a trailer or caravan Each time you select reverse gear, the system automatically detects an obstacle. In this case it is possible to deactivate the function by installing a switch: please contact your Renault Dealer. Faults When the system detects a fault a beep sounds for 5 seconds as a warning when reverse gear is selected. Consult your Renault Dealer. This function is an additional aid which indicates the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle when reversing by means of sound signals. Under no circumstances should it replace vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver when reversing. The driver should always pay attention to sudden faults which may occur when driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles (such as a child, animal, pram or bicycle...) or an obstacle which is too small or narrow (average sized stone, very narrow post...) when manoeuvring. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 A B 2 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l5 Page 2.32 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 32 2.32 AUTOMATIC GEARBOX Selector lever 1 Indicator strip A or, depending on the vehicle, the information display B informs you of the position of the lever 1. P: Park R: Reverse N: Neutral D: Automatic mode M:Manual mode 8: display of gear engaged in manual mode : warning light to request you press the brake pedal to shift from position P : warning light requesting lever to be positioned at P or N. Driving With the gear lever in position P or N, switch on the ignition. With your foot on the brake pedal (the warning light goes out), shift from position P. The lever must only be engaged in D or R when the vehicle is stationary. Foot on the brake and accelerator pedal released. For safety reasons, it is essential to apply the brake before pressing the unlocking button 2 to shift out of the P position. Driving in automatic mode Select position D. In the majority of traffic conditions, you will not have to touch the gear selector lever again: the gear changing will take place automatically at the right time and at the most suitable engine speed because the automatic system takes into account the vehicle load and road surface and adjusts itself to the particular driving style you have chosen. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B 1 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l5 Page 2.33 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 33 2.33 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (continued) Accelerating and overtaking Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly (until you pass the point of resistance). This will activate the “kickdown” switch giving a change down to a lower gear. Driving in manual mode With the gear lever 1 in position D, bring the lever to the left: indicator light M and the gear selected light up on the instrument panel. Successive movements of the lever 1 allow you to change gears manually. - to move down through the gears, pull the lever to the rear. - to move up through the gears, push the lever forwards. The gear selected appears on the instrument panel: either on the indicator strip A or on the information display B (depending on the vehicle). Special cases In certain driving conditions (e.g.: engine protection, operation of the electronic stability program: ESP) the automated system may change the gear automatically. Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeuvres, the gear change may be refused by the automated system: in this case the gear display flashes for a few seconds as a warning. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 nu633~6_fra_G2.qxd 30/05/02 l5:l5 Page 2.34 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T2.WIN 15/7/2002 18:05 - page 34 2.34 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (continued) Howto drive as economically as possible Leave the selector in position D (drive) on the open road. Press the accelerator pedal lightly to ensure gear changes at comparatively low engine speeds. Special circumstances - If the bends and hills on the road do not allow you to stay in automatic mode (e.g.: in mountains), it is recommended that you change to manual mode. This will prevent successive gear changes by the automatic gearbox when climbing, and permit engine braking in the event of long descents. - In cold weather, start the engine and wait a few seconds before moving the selector lever from position P or N and engaging it in D or R to prevent the engine stalling. - Vehicle not fitted with traction control: on a slippery surface, change to manual mode and select second gear (or even third) before starting the engine to avoid wheel spin when starting. Stopping the vehicle When the vehicle is stationary, keeping your foot on the brake pedal, move the lever to position P (park): the gearbox is in neutral and the drive wheels are mechanically locked by the transmission. Apply the handbrake. Faults - If this warning light lights up when driving, it may indicate a fault. Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. - and while driving, if these warning lights come on at the same time, avoid leaving the gear lever in position D (or R) when stopping in traffic: always return to position N when you have to stop. Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. - If a vehicle with an automatic gearbox breaks down, see the information on towing in section 5. - If the gear lever becomes jammed in position P even though you are pressing the brake pedal, the level can be released manually. To do this, undo the upper section of the gaiter 3. Press the button located underneath the gaiter and at the same time press the unlocking button 2 to move the lever from position P. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:35 Page 3.0l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:32 - page 1 3.01 Section 3: Your comfort Air vents ................................................................................................................................................. 3.02 - 3.03 Heating and air conditioning ............................................................................................................. 3.04 ¬ 3.19 Electric windows ................................................................................................................................ 3.20 ¬ 3.23 Windscreen ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.23 Sun visor .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.24 Sunroof .................................................................................................................................................. 3.25 - 3.26 Interior lights ........................................................................................................................................ 3.27 - 3.28 Storage compartments / passenger compartment fittings ............................................................... 3.29 ¬ 3.33 Ashtrays / cigarette lighters ............................................................................................................................ 3.34 Rear bench seat ................................................................................................................................................ 3.35 Luggage compartment ..................................................................................................................................... 3.36 Rear shelf ......................................................................................................................................................... 3.37 Storage compartments / luggage compartment fittings ................................................................................ 3.38 Transporting items in the luggage compartment .......................................................................................... 3.39 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:36 Page 3.02 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 2 3.02 AIR VENTS (air outlets) 1 - Left-hand air vent 2 - Left-hand side window demister 3 - Windscreen demisting vents 4 - Centre air vents 5 - Control panel 6 - Right-hand side window demister 7 - Right-hand side air vent 8 - Footwell heater outlets for front and rear passengers WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 2 3 4 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.03 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 3 3.03 AIR VENTS Air flow Move wheel 1 or 4 (beyond the point where a certain resistance is felt). : maximum flow : closed Direction Right/left: move the tabs 2 or 3. Up/down: lower or raise the tabs 2 or 3. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B C D E F G nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.04 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 4 3.04 HEATING / VENTILATION Controls A - electric windscreen operating indicator light B - air temperature adjustment C - air conditioning operation D - distribution of air in the passenger compartment E - operation of the heated rear screen and the electric windscreen F - adjustment of the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment G - air recirculation operation Adjusting the air temperature Move control B. Turning the knob to the right increases the temperature. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS D nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 5 3.05 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Distribution of air in the passenger compartment Move control D. Position All the air flow is directed to the demisting vents for the windscreen and the side windows. Position The air flow is distributed between the demisting vents for the windscreen, the side windows and the front and rear footwells. Position The air flow is distributed between the air vents, the side window demisters, the windscreen demisters and the front and rear footwells. Position The air flow is distributed to all the air vents and the front and rear footwells. Position The air flow is only directed to all the air vents. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS C F nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 6 3.06 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Adjusting the amount of air supplied to the passenger compartment Normal use Move control F (from 1 to 4). Passenger compartment ventilation is by blown air. The ventilation fan determines how much air enters and stabilises the temperature in the passenger compartment. Turning the knob to the right increases the air flow. Limited use Control F at position 0. In this position: - air conditioning stops automatically even if key C is activated; - the ventilation speed of air supplied to the passenger compartment is zero; - there is, however, a slight flow of air when the vehicle is moving. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A E nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.07 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 7 3.07 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Rear screen and electric windscreen de-icing (depending on vehicle) Vehicle without electric heated windscreen - Press button E: the indicator light will light up. This function demists and de-ices the rear window and the electric de-icing rear view mirrors quickly. There are two ways to switch this function off: - it stops automatically after a specified time; - by pressing button E again. Vehicle with electric heated windscreen Press successively on button E to select: - operation of rear screen demisting and de-icing and rear-view mirror de-icing: the indicator light on button E lights up: - operating of rear screen de-icing/ demisting, rear-viewmirror de-icing and very rapid windscreen de-icing/demisting: the indicator light on button E and the indicator light A light up These functions are stopped: - automatically after a specified time; - by pressing button E again. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS B C F C2 C1 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.08 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 8 3.08 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Air conditioning control Control C starts or stops the air conditioning system. Press successively on button C to select: - the economy air conditioning function. Indicator light C1 is lit up. The system determines the level of cooling necessary to limit fuel consumption; - the maximum air conditioning function. Indicator light C2 is lit up. There is maximum cooling; - switching the air conditioning off. There is no cold air when the control F is at position 0, even if button C is activated (the indicator light goes out). The use of the air conditioning system: - lowers the internal passenger compartment temperature; - eliminates condensation more quickly. Note: - you can change the air conditioning temperature at any time using control B. - the air conditioning may be used in all conditions, but does not operate when the external temperature is low. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS C nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 9 3.09 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Air conditioning control (continued) If no cool air is produced Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are in good condition. If not, stop the air conditioning system(press button C until the indicator lights go out) and call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer. Do not open the refrigerant circuit: the fluid is dangerous to the eyes and skin. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS G nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:37 Page 3.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 10 3.10 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) Operating the air recirculation (isolating the passenger compartment) - Press control G: the operating indicator light will light up. In these conditions air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle. Air recirculation: - isolated the external atmosphere (driving in polluted areas...); - allows the desired temperature of the passenger compartment to be achieved as quickly as possible. Prolonged use of the air recirculation mode may cause the windows to mist up or lead to odours, as the air is not renewed. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode (external air) as soon as you have passed through the polluted areas, by pressing button G. Air recirculation mode operating time is limited by the system except when there are high external temperatures: control G indicator light goes out. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 4 5 11 10 9 8 7 6 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:38 Page 3.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 11 3.11 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING Controls 1 - Automatic mode operation key 2 - Left-hand temperature adjustment button 3 - Display 4 - Right-hand temperature adjustment button 5 - Air recirculation button and automatic recirculation operation 6 - System switch off button 7 - Air distribution adjustment button 8 - Ventilation speed adjustment button 9 - “See clear” key to demist and de-ice the windows 10 - Rear screen de-icing button 11 - Air conditioning key Keys 1, 5, 6, 9, 10 and 11 incorporate the indicator lights: - indicator light lit up, the function is switched on, - indicator light not lit up, the function is switched off. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 4 5b nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:38 Page 3.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 12 3.12 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Ambient temperature (automatic mode) The automatic air conditioning system guarantees (with the exception of extreme cases) the ambient temperature in the passenger compartment and maintains a good level of visibility. Operation of the automatic mode - Press button 1: the indicator light will light up. The heating and ventilation system independently manages the left hand (adjustment key 2) and right hand (adjustment key 4) temperature. - to increase the temperature, turn button 2 or 4 to the right; - to decrease the temperature, turn button 2 or 4 to the left; The temperature can be set between 16 and 26°C. Press the Auto key 1 to switch on the automatic recirculation mode (indicator light 5b lights up). Special note On some vehicles the Renault Card stores the settings selected by the user: this includes the temperature adjustment settings. It is therefore recommended that you keep the same Renault Card so that you can reuse your personal settings. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:38 Page 3.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 13 3.13 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Ambient temperature (automatic mode) (continued) Operation To obtain and maintain the temperature selected and to maintain good visibility, the system controls: - the ventilation speed; - the distribution of air; - the air recirculation management; - starting or stopping the air conditioning; - the temperature of the air blown to the left or right; - the automatic operation of the rear screen de-icing/demisting and/or windscreen, if fitted. The values displayed are the air temperature setting. When the vehicle is started in cold or hot weather, increasing or decreasing the values displayed does not mean that the temperature is reached more quickly (whatever the air temperature indicated, the system optimises the temperature increase or decrease). Generally, except in particularly uncomfortable circumstances, the dashboard air vents may remain open whatever the climatic conditions may be. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS B A B 3 10 10a nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:38 Page 3.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 14 3.14 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Rear screen de-icing/demisting Press key 10; the indicator light 10a lights up and the indicator lights A and B appear on the display 3. This function demists the rear window and the electric heated rear-view mirrors quickly. To exit this function: - it stops automatically after a specified time; - press key 10 again. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 A B C B 3 9 8 5b 5a 11a nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:38 Page 3.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 15 3.15 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) “See clear” function Press key 9; the indicator light lights up and indicator lights A, B and C appear on display 3. The Auto key indicator light goes out: the air distribution is no longer in automatic operating mode. This function quickly demists and de-ices the windscreen, the front side windows, the rear-viewmirrors and the rear window. For efficiency, this automatically switches on the air conditioning (indicator light 11a lit up) and switches off air recirculation (indicator lights 5a and 5b not lit up). The best possible flow of air is then directed towards the windscreen and front window air outlets. Special note For vehicles equipped with an electric heated windscreen, this is operated when the See clear function is used. Note: If you want to alter the air flow (which may be noisy in the passenger compartment), press key 8. There are two possibilities for quitting this function: - Press the Auto key 1 (indicator light lit up); - press key 9 again (the indicator light goes out). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 D 7 1a nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 16 3.16 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Personalised air distribution operation The system normally operates in automatic mode but you can alter the standard settings used by the system (quantity of air, etc.). The automatic mode is switched off by pressing button 7 (indicator light 1a goes out). There are six air distribution settings which are obtained by pressing key 7. The arrows on indicator light D show the setting selected: - the arrow pointing upwards represents air flow from the windscreen demister vents; - the arrow pointing downwards represents air flow to the footwells; - the horizontal arrowrepresents air flow to the dashboard air vents. The indicator light on key 1 (automatic mode) will go out when manual air distribution is selected, but only the air distribution is no longer controlled automatically by the system. Press button 1 to return to automatic mode. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 11 8 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.l7 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 17 3.17 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Switching air conditioning on or off In automatic mode, the system switches the air conditioning system on or off, depending on the external climatic conditions. The automatic mode is switched off by pressing button 11: the indicator light in button 1 will go out. The air conditioning is switched on (indicator light lit up) or off (indicator light not lit up) using key 11. Note: the “See clear” function automatically operates the air conditioning (indicator light lit up). Press button 1 to return to automatic mode. Varying the blower speed In automatic mode, the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired temperature. The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the top or bottom of key 8, (the AUTO key 1 indicator light goes out). This key increases or decreases the amount of air blown into the passenger compartment. In automatic mode, in cold weather, the ventilation will not start immediately at maximum power but will increase progressively until the engine temperature is warm enough to heat the passenger compartment air. This may take a few seconds or several minutes. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 5 9 6 5a 5b nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.l8 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 18 3.18 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Air recirculation mode Press successively on button 5 to select: - automatic recirculation (indicator light 5a lit up); - continuous recirculation (indicator light 5b lit up); - external air. During recirculation, air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled, with no air being taken from outside the vehicle. Air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be isolated (driving in polluted areas). Prolonged use of the air recirculation mode may cause the windows to mist up or lead to odours, as the air is not renewed. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode (external air or automatic recirculation) as soon as you have passed through the polluted areas, by pressing button 5. Automatic recirculation mode Indicator light 5a comes on, analyses the outside air quality, and when necessary, automatically isolates the passenger compartment. Stopping the system Press key 6. The indicator light lights up. No more information appears on the display 3. The system is switched off. This mode isolated the passenger compartment from the external atmosphere. Press key 1 or 9 to exit this mode. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.l9 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 19 3.19 AIR CONDITIONING: MISCELLANEOUS If no cool air is produced Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are in good condition.Otherwise, switch off the climate control and call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer. Do not open the refrigerant fluid circuit. Fuel consumption When the air conditioning is operating, you will normally note an increase in fuel consumption (especially when driving in an urban area). Faults If you notice that the de-icing, demisting or air conditioning has become less effective, this may be caused by a clogged particle filter element. Generally, in the event of a fault, consult your Renault Dealer. After prolonged use of the air conditioning, it is normal to note the presence of water underneath the vehicle, caused by condensation. Vehicles fitted with an auxiliary heater Some vehicles are fitted with an auxiliary heater which enables the passenger compartment to be heated more quickly. This device only functions when the engine is running and in cold weather. When the device is functioning you can normally see a small amount of smoke on the right-hand side of the vehicle coming from the heater's exhaust system. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.20 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 20 3.20 ELECTRIC WINDOWS With the ignition on: - press the switch to open the window to the desired height (note: the rear windows do not open fully); - release the switch to raise the window to the height desired. From the driver’s seat Operate switch: - 1 for the driver’s side; - 2 for the front passenger's side; - 3 and 5 for the rear passengers. From the front passenger's seat Operate switch 6 From the rear seats Operate switch 7 Child safety Switch 4 overrides the operation of the rear windows. Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck, arm, hand, etc.). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.2l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 21 3.21 ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS The one-touch mode is an addition to the electric window operation described above. If fitted in the vehicle, it can be used for: - the driver's window; - the two front windows; - the four windows. Operate switches 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 or 7. The system operates: - with the ignition on; - with the ignition off until the front doors are opened/closed (limited to approximately 20 minutes). Child safety Switch 4 overrides the operation of the rear windows. Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck, arm, hand, etc.). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.22 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 22 3.22 ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS (continued) One-touch mode - Press the switch concerned fully and quickly: the window will open completely. - Raise the switch concerned fully and quickly: the window will close completely. Pressing the switch during this operation will stop the window moving. Normal mode - Press the switch concerned halfway to open the window and release at the desired height. - Raise the switch concerned halfway to close the window and release at the desired height. Remote control window closing (if fitted) When you lock the doors from the exterior using the Renault Card and you press the locking button on the Renault Card for more than 2 seconds, the windows will close automatically. Special note If the window detects resistance when closing (e.g.: a person's fingers, an animal's paw, a the branch of a tree...) it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres. Faults If the window detects resistance when closing it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres. In case of a fault when closing a window the system changes to continuous mode: press the switch concerned as often as necessary to close the window, then hold the switch (still on the closure side) for a second to reinitialise the system. If necessary, consult your local Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:39 Page 3.23 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 23 3.23 MANUAL WINDOWS WINDSCREEN Manually operated rear windows Operate window winder 1. Windscreen with reflective layers This windscreen reflects the sun and, in particular, limits the infrared rays entering the passenger compartment. There are two zones which allow passes to be affixed to the windscreen (e.g.: motorway permits, car park season tickets, etc.), located on either side of the rear view mirror. Laminated side windows It is recommended that you replace damaged (cracked) windows: it may break if a passer-by or passenger hits the window. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 3 1 6 7 6 5 4 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.24 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 24 3.24 SUN VISOR Front sun visor Lower the sun visor 1. Non-illuminated courtesy mirror 2 Lift cover 3. Illuminated courtesy mirror Lift cover 3. The light comes on automatically. Rear sun blind Pull to sun visor up using tab 5 until the hook 4 engages in the retainer (make sure the hooks are properly locked in position). Rear sun blind Pull the sun blind using tab 7 until the two hooks 6 engage in the retainers (make sure the hooks are properly locked in position). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 A O B 3 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.25 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 25 3.25 ELECTRIC SUNROOF The sunroof must be completely closed before it is changed. To tilt the sunroof With the ignition on: - Opening: pull the sunblind 1 back and then bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position A, B or C until the required tilt angle is obtained; - Closing: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position O. To slide the sunroof With the ignition on: - Opening: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position D, E, F, G, H, or I, until the required opening is obtained; sunblind 1 is drawn back at the same time; - Closing: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position O then close the screen 1 again. - Ensure the sunroof is properly closed before leaving your vehicle. - Clean the seal every three months using products selected by Renault's Technical Department. - Do not open the sunroof immediately after the vehicle has been in the rain or after your car has been washed. Child safety Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck, arm, hand, etc. in the window). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 O nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.26 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 26 3.26 ELECTRIC SUNROOF (continued) Remote control sunroof closing (for vehicles fitted with automatic remote control windows). When you lock the doors using the Renault Card and you press the locking button on the Renault Card for more than 2 seconds, the windows and sunroof will close automatically. The system operates: - with the ignition on. - with the ignition off until the front doors are opened/closed (limited to approximately 20 minutes). Special instructions - If the sunroof detects resistance when closing (e.g.: a person's fingers, an animal's paw, a the branch of a tree...) it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres. - If the sunroof was closed using the Renault Card, the sunroof position selected before closing can be recalled by pressed button 2. Sunroof closing fault In the event of a fault, press switch 2, set to O, until the sunroof is fully closed. Consult your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 A 4 B 5 6 7 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.27 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 27 3.27 INTERIOR LIGHTS Courtesy lights A or B When switch 2 or 6 is pressed: - continuous lighting is obtained; - intermittent lighting is obtained, controlled by opening one of the doors. It only goes out when the doors are correctly closed; - or the light does not come on at all. Depending on the vehicle, it is possible to adjust the intensity of lighting by turning wheel 4. Map reading lights In the front seats, press switch 1 for the driver and 3 for the passenger. In the rear seats, press switch 5 or 7. Remote unlocking of the doors activates the courtesy and floor lights temporarily. If a door is opened the timed light operation period will begin again. The lights will then fade progressively. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 10 9 8 C nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.28 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 28 3.28 INTERIOR LIGHTS (continued) Courtesy lights C When you slide switch 8 - continuous lighting is obtained; - intermittent lighting is obtained, controlled by opening one of the doors. It only goes out when the doors are correctly closed; - or the light does not come on at all. Floor lights 9 These are located underneath the dashboard: one on the driver's side and one on the passenger's side. Remote unlocking of the doors activates the courtesy and floor lights temporarily. If a door is opened the timed light operation period will begin again. The lights will then fade progressively. Door lights Each light 10 lights up when a door is opened. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 4 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.29 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 29 3.29 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS Driver's side glove box 1 Central storage compartment To open, press the centre of the cover 2 then release: it opens automatically. Note: depending on the vehicle, this compartment is designed to conceal the car radio, odysline, Carminat controls... (see the special notes for these fittings). Cup holder 3 Press rod 4 then release: the cup holder opens automatically. To store it, press rod 4, the cup holder automatically closes. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 5 6 7 8 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:40 Page 3.30 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 30 3.30 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) Passenger side storage compartment Pull handle 5 to open the storage compartment. Inside the cover are places for a pen, a card, cups, etc. Like the passenger compartment, this storage compartment is ventilated and air conditioned. Raise or lower the blanking cover 6 to open or close the air inlet. Door storage compartments 8 Front door storage compartments 7 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 11 10 9 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.3l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 31 3.31 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) Front central arm rest storage compartments Lift cover 9. If fitted, lift the first small storage compartment to access the large storage compartment. Accessories socket 10 The interior accessories socket 10 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W (voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department. Front seat storage compartment pockets 11 No objects should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres, thus obstructing its use. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 12 13 14 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.32 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:33 - page 32 3.32 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) Front seat storage pockets 12 Accessories socket 13 The accessories socket 13 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W (voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department. Spectacles holder 14 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 16 16 15 18 18 17 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.33 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 33 3.33 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) Rear armrest storage compartments Lower the armrest 15, lift the cover 16 using the unlocking handle 17. Cup holder Press bar 18 then release: the cup holder begins to open automatically. Complete the operation by pulling it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 3 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.34 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 34 3.34 ASHTRAYS / CIGARETTE LIGHTERS Ashtray in front console To open, lower cover 1. To empty the ashtray, pull the cover towards you and the ashtray will be released from its housing. Cigarette lighter With the ignition on, press in the cigarette lighter 2. It will spring back with a click when it is ready. Pull it out to use. After use, replace it without pushing it all the way in. Ashtray in rear console To open, pull the handle 3 until it locks. To empty the ashtray, pull the cover beyond the locking point and the ashtray will be released from its housing. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.35 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 35 3.35 REAR BENCH SEAT The seatback may be folded down to allow bulky objects to be carried. To fold down the seatback Lower the rear head restraint, see information on rear head restraint in section 1. Press button 1 and lower the seatback. Transporting objects If you have to place objects on the folded seatback, it is vital that you remove the head restraints before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat. See the “Transporting objects in the luggage compartment” information in section 3. - When refitting the seatback, make sure it is locked in place correctly. - Where seat covers are fitted, make sure these do not prevent the seatback latch from locking in. - Make sure the seat belts are positioned correctly. - Reposition the head restraints. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 2 3 3 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.36 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 36 3.36 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT The tailgate is locked and unlocked at the same time as the doors. To open Press button 1 and lift the tailgate. To close Lower the tailgate using handle 2 inside the tailgate to help you. Opening the doors from inside the car If it is not possible to unlock the luggage compartment, it can be opened manually from inside. - access the luggage compartment by tilting the seatback(s) on the rear bench seat. - insert a pencil or similar object in the cavity 3 and slide the unit as shown in the drawing. - push the luggage compartment lid to open it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.37 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 37 3.37 REAR PARCEL SHELF Rear parcel shelf To remove, unhook the two straps 1 from the tailgate. Do not place any objects, especially heavy or hard objects, on the parcel shelf. These may pose a risk to the vehicle occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Lift the rear parcel shelf slightly and pull it towards you. Proceed in reverse order to refit the shelf. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 4 4 4 4 2 nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.38 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 38 3.38 STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS Accessories socket The accessories socket 1 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W(voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department. Fittings in the luggage compartment An accessory storage space 2 can be used for a tool kit, warning triangle, etc. Accessory storage space 3 can be used for an oil can, for example. Lashing rings 4 These are for securing items transported in the luggage compartment (see information on transporting objects in the luggage compartment). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.39 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 39 3.39 TRANSPORTING ITEMS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT Always position the objects transported so that the largest surface is against: - The rear seatback for normal loads (example A). - The folded down seat for maximum loads (example B). Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor. If you have to place objects on the folded seatback, it is vital that you remove the head restraints before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat. Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor. Use the lashing rings located on the luggage compartment floor. The luggage should be loaded in such a way that no item will be thrown forward and strike the occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts, even if the seats are not occupied. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G3.qxd 24/05/02 l5:4l Page 3.40 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-5_eng_T3.WIN 30/7/2002 14:34 - page 40 3.40 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l8 Page 4.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 9 4.09 LEVELS Engine coolant level The level when cold should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion bottle 1. Top this level up when cold before it reaches the MIN mark. No operations may be carried out on the cooling circuit when the engine is hot. Danger of burns. Frequency for checking coolant level Check the coolant level regularly. (Very severe damage is likely to be caused to the engine if it runs out of coolant.) If topping up is required, only use products approved by Renault's Technical Department: - anti-freeze protection; - anti-corrosion protection of the cooling system. Consult your Renault Dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels. Frequency of oil change Refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l8 Page 4.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 10 4.10 LEVELS (continued) Power assisted steering pump 1 Frequency of changing Refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle. Level Remove the engine compartment cover panels. Refer to the information on engine compartment cover panels in section 4 for more details. When the engine is cold the level should be visible between the Min and Max levels on the reservoir 1. For topping up or refilling with oil, use products approved by Renault's Technical Department. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l8 Page 4.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 11 4.11 LEVELS (continued) Brake fluid level This should be checked frequently, especially if you notice even the slightest loss in braking efficiency. Level 1 The level falls naturally as the brake pads wear, but it should never be allowed to fall below the MINIMUM warning mark. Filling After any operation on the hydraulic circuit, a specialist must replace the brake fluid. Only use fluids approved by Renault's Technical Department (and taken from a sealed container). Frequency of changing Refer to the Servicing booklet for your vehicle. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l9 Page 4.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 12 4.12 LEVELS (continued) FILTERS BATTERY Windscreen / headlight washer reservoir Topping up Through cap 1. Liquid Water + special windscreen washer fluid (anti-freeze product in winter) approved by RENAULT’s Technical Department. Jets Use a flat screwdriver to position the windscreen washer jets. The replacement of filter elements (air filter, passenger compartment filter, diesel filter, etc.) is anticipated in the maintenance operations for your vehicle. Frequency for replacing filter components: see the Servicing booklet for your vehicle. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. The battery does not require servicing. Never open cover 2. Take care when moving the battery since it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin. If it should, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. Keep all flames, red-hot objects and sparks away from the battery as there is a risk of explosion. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l9 Page 4.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 13 q 4.13 BODYWORK MAINTENANCE Protection against the action of corrosive agents Although your vehicle has been treated with very effective anti-corrosion products, it nevertheless remains subject to the action of: • Corrosives in the atmosphere - Atmospheric pollution (built-up and industrial areas). - Saline atmosphere (near the sea, particularly in hot weather). - Seasonal and humid climatic conditions, especially road salt in winter. • Abrasives Wind-carried dust and sand, mud, road grit thrown up by other vehicles. • Minor impacts Aminimum amount of protection is necessary to guard your vehicle against such risks so as not to lose the benefit of these developments. What you should not do • Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or freezing temperatures. • Scrape off mud or dirt without pre-wetting. • Allow external dirt to accumulate. • Allow rust to form following minor impacts. • Use solvents not approved by Renault's Technical Department to remove spots as this could damage the paintwork. • Drive frequently in snow or muddy conditions without periodically washing the car, particularly under the wheel arches and body. • Degrease or clean mechanical components (e.g. engine compartment), underneath the bodywork, parts with hinges (e.g. inside the fuel tank flap) and painted plastic external fittings (e.g. bumpers) using pressure cleaning apparatus or by spraying on products not approved by Renault's Technical Department. If adequate precautions are not taken, this could give rise to corrosion or incorrect operation. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l9 Page 4.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 14 4.14 BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (continued) What you should do • Wash your vehicle frequently, preferably using our recommended cleaning products and use a high-pressure jet to rinse off the underside of the vehicle and the wheel arches in particular to get rid of: - Spots of tree resin and industrial grime. - Bird droppings that contain chemicals which rapidly discolour paintwork and may even cause the paint to peel off: the vehicle must be washed immediately to remove these marks since it is impossible to remove them by polishing. - Salt deposited in the wheel arches and underneath the body after driving in areas where the roads are chemically treated. - Mud in the wheel arches and under the body which forms damp patches. • Keep well away from the vehicle in front when driving on freshly laid surfaces to prevent paint damage. • Repair, or have repaired quickly patches where the paint has been damaged to prevent corrosion spreading. • If your vehicle is protected by the Renault anti-corrosion warranty, remember to visit the body shop periodically. Consult the anti-corrosion booklet. • Respect local regulations about washing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your vehicle on a public highway). • Before using a revolving brush type car wash, check the mounting of exterior equipment, additional headlights and rear-view mirrors and secure the wiper blades and radio aerial with adhesive tape. If your vehicle has a car phone, remove the aerial. • If mechanical components have to be cleaned, their protection must be reapplied by spraying on products approved by Renault's Technical Department. We have selected special products to care for your vehicle and you can obtain these from Renault accessory outlets. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l9 Page 4.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 15 4.15 INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE What you need to do Whatever type of stain is on the trim, use soapy water (warm if necessary ) based on: • natural soap, • washing up liquid (with one part washing up liquid to 200 parts water). Rinse off with a soft, damp cloth. Special instructions • Instrument panel window displays (e.g. instrument panel, clock, exterior temperature, radio, etc.). Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool). If this does not clean them properly, use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth. Cleaning products containing alcohol may not be used under any circumstances. • Seat belts These must be kept clean. Use products selected by Renault's Technical Department (or Renault accessory outlets) or warm soapy water using a sponge and dry off with a dry cloth. Do not use cleaning agents or dyes. What you should not do It is strongly recommended that you do not use high pressure cleaning apparatus or sprays inside the passenger compartment: if the necessary precautions are not taken, this could impair the correct functioning of electric or electronic components in the vehicle or have other detrimental effects. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G4.qxd 23/05/02 l4:l9 Page 4.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T4.WIN 31/7/2002 10:08 - page 16 4.16 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.0l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 1 5.01 Section 5: Practical advice Emergency spare wheel .................................................................................................................................... 5.02 Tool kit (jack - wheelbrace) ............................................................................................................................. 5.03 Hubcaps ............................................................................................................................................................. 5.04 Changing a wheel ............................................................................................................................................. 5.05 Tyres (tyre safety, wheels, winter use) ............................................................................................... 5.06 ¬ 5.08 Headlights (replacing bulbs) ............................................................................................................... 5.09 ¬ 5.13 Rear lights (replacing bulbs) ............................................................................................................... 5.14 ¬ 5.16 Side repeaters (replacing bulbs) ...................................................................................................................... 5.16 Interior lights (replacing bulbs) .......................................................................................................... 5.17 ¬ 5.21 Fuses ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.22 ¬ 5.24 Battery ................................................................................................................................................... 5.25 ¬ 5.27 Renault Card: battery ........................................................................................................................................ 5.28 Fitting a radio/accessories .................................................................................................................... 5.29 - 5.30 Wipers (replacing the blades) .......................................................................................................................... 5.31 Towing .................................................................................................................................................. 5.32 ¬ 5.34 Faults ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.35 ¬ 5.41 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 4 3 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.02 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 2 5.02 EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL Emergency spare wheel 4 This is located in the luggage compartment. To access the emergency spare wheel: - open the luggage compartment lid; - Lift the flap using handle 1; - Hold the flap open using the hook 2 situated under the rear parcel shelf. - unclip and open the retainer 3; - remove the jack; - unscrew the central mounting; - remove the tool kit, - remove the emergency spare wheel. If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use. Using the spare wheel The tyre pressure monitor function does not monitor the emergency spare wheel (the wheel replaced by the emergency spare wheel disappears from the display and/or the information display). Refer to the Tyre pressure monitor information in Section 2. Note: The aluminium rim wheel bolts can be used on an emergency spare wheel with steel rims. Vehicle fitted with an emergency spare wheel which is smaller than the other four wheels. When using the emergency spare wheel, driving speed should not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 2 3 4 5 6 1 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.03 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 3 q 5.03 TOOL KIT The tool kit A is located in the luggage compartment, on top of the emergency spare wheel. To access the tools, unclip and lift the retaining part 1. Jack 2 Release the jack 2. When refitting the jack, fold it completely and replace it in its location. The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs or to gain access under the vehicle. Wheel spanner 3 This is used to tighten or release the wheel bolts. Hubcap spanner 4 or 5 It is used to remove the hubcaps. Towing ring 6 Refer to the information on towing in section 5. Storage compartments Storage compartments are provided in the tool kit for a fuse box and an immobiliser bolt. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 4 5 6 7 2 1 D A C B nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.04 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 4 5.04 HUBCAPS - WHEELS Hubcap (example: hubcap 1) Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner 3 (located in the tool kit) by engaging the hook into one of the openings around the edge of the hubcap. When refitting the hubcap, align it with the valve 2. Push the retaining hooks in, starting with valve side A, followed by B and C, finishing at the side opposite the valve D. Central hubcap (example: hubcap 4) Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner (located in the tool kit). To refit the hubcap, position it so that the rim is aligned with the hubcap recess. Central wheel hubcap (example: hubcap 5) Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner 7 (located in the tool kit) by inserting the spanner 7 into the recess 6. To refit the hubcap align it with the recess 6 and tighten it with the spanner 7. We would advise you to note the number engraved on the spanner so that you can replace it if it is lost. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 5 q 5.05 CHANGING A WHEEL Park your vehicle on firm, flat ground (if necessary, placing a plank under the jack). Switch on the hazard warning lights. Apply the handbrake and engage a gear (first or reverse, or P for automatic gearboxes). Ask all the passengers to leave the car and keep away from the traffic. • If necessary, remove the hubcap. • Loosen the wheel bolts using the wheelbrace 1. Fit it so that you press downwards rather than pulling upwards. • Offer up the jack horizontally, the jack head must be positioned at the height of the supporting metal 2 provided in the lower section of the bodywork closest to the wheel concerned. • Screw up the jack by hand at first to align the base plate (which should be inclined further inwards than the jack head). Use a piece of wood under the base plate if on soft ground. • Turn a few times to lift the wheel off the ground. • Remove the bolts. • Take off the wheel. • Position the emergency spare wheel on the central hub and turn it to locate the mounting holes in the wheel and the hub. • Tighten the bolts and lower the jack. • Tighten the bolts fully when the wheel is on the ground. If you have a puncture, replace the wheel as soon as possible. A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected (and repaired if possible) by a specialist. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 6 5.06 TYRES Tyre safety - road wheels The tyres are the only contact between the vehicle and the road, so it is essential to keep them in good condition. You must make sure that your tyres conform to local road regulations. When they need to be replaced, only tyres of the same make, dimension, type and profile should be used. Tyres fitted to the vehicle should either be identical to those fitted originally or conform to those recommended by your Renault Dealer. Maintaining the tyres The tyres must be in good condition and the tread form must have sufficient depth; tyres approved by Renault's Technical Department have wear warning strips 1 which are risers moulded into the tread at several points. When the tread has worn down to the level of these risers, they become visible 2: the tyres concerned must be replaced now as only 1.6 mm maximum of tread remains and this is not sufficient to maintain good grip on wet roads. Faults which occur when driving, such as striking the kerb, may damage the tyres and could lead to misalignment of the front axle geometry. An overloaded car, long journeys by motorway, particularly in very hot weather, or continual driving on poorly surfaced minor roads will lead to more rapid tyre wear and affect safety. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.07 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 7 q 5.07 TYRES (continued) Tyre pressures Tyre pressures must be adhered to. (Remember to check the spare wheel at the same time.) Tyre pressures must be checked at least once a month and always before a long journey. (Refer to the section on Tyre pressures.) Incorrect tyre pressures lead to abnormal tyre wear and unusually hot running, factors which may seriously affect safety and lead to: - poor roadholding - the risk of blow-outs or of throwing a tread at high speed. Tyre pressures depend on the load and the driving speed. Adjust the pressures according to the conditions of use. (Refer to the section on tyre pressures.) Pressures should be checked when the tyres are cold; ignore higher pressures which may be reached in hot weather or after driving at high speeds. If tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold, assume an increase of 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI). Never deflate a hot tyre. Note: a label (depending on country or version) affixed to the edge or frame of the driver's door gives the recommended tyre pressures. Changing wheels around Each of the sensors integrated in the valves is devoted to one single wheel: under no circumstances should you swap the wheels. There is a risk of false information leading to serious consequences. Fitting new tyres For safety reasons, this operation must only be carried out by a specialist. Fitting different tyres may change your vehicle as follows: - It may mean that your vehicle no longer conforms to current regulations. - It may change the way it handles when cornering. - It may cause the steering to be heavy. - It may cause tyre noise. - It may affect the use of chains. Spare wheel Refer to the information on the spare wheel and instructions on how to change a wheel in section 5. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.08 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 8 5.08 TYRES (continued) Use in winter • Chains For safety reasons, fitting chains to the rear axle is absolutely forbidden. Chains must not be fitted to tyres which are larger than those originally fitted to the vehicle. Chains may only be fitted to tyres of the same size as those originally fitted to your vehicle. Special features for models fitted with 17” wheels If you wish to use chains, you must use special equipment. Consult you Renault Dealer. • “Snow” or winter tyres We would recommend that these be fitted to all four wheels to ensure that your vehicle retains maximum road holding. Note: We would point out that these tyres may sometimes have: - A specific direction of rotation. - A maximum speed which may be lower than the maximum speed of your vehicle. • Studded tyres This type of equipment may only be used for a limited period and as laid down by local legislation. It is necessary to keep to the speed specified by current legislation. As a minimum, these tyres may be fitted to the two front axle wheels. In all cases, we would recommend that you consult your Renault Dealer who will be able to advise you on the choice of equipment which is most suitable for your vehicle. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 3 D C E A B 1 2 2 C nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:l9 Page 5.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 9 q 5.09 HEADLIGHTS: ACCESS To access the headlights, first remove the various items of engine compartment cover panel (A, B, C, D, E) Accessing the left-hand headlight Cover panel C Press the tab 2 to release the cover panel and remove it. Accessing the right-hand headlight Vehicle with cover panel B - Unclip the central cover panel B by pressing button 1. Slide it to the left and remove it. - disengage the cover panel A by gently lifting it and pulling it to the right. - Remove the neck 3 from the windscreen washer reservoir. Vehicle with cover panel E - disengage the cover panel D by gently lifting it and pulling it to the right. - Remove the neck 3 from the windscreen washer reservoir. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B 6 2 5 3 1 4 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 10 5.10 HEADLIGHTS: replacing bulbs Main beam / dipped headlights Remove the cover A or B by turning it a quarter of a turn. Remove the connector from the bulb. Release the spring 2 or 4 and remove the bulb. Halogen-type bulb: 1 ¶ H1 3 ¶ H7 anti UV (see box). Do not touch the glass of the halogen bulb. Hold it by its base. When the bulb has been changed, please refit the cover. Front side lights Remove the bulb holder 5 to access the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. Direction indicator lights Turn the bulb holder 6 by a quarter turn and remove the bulb. Bulb type: orange PY21 W bayonet bulb. Cleaning headlights As the headlights are made of plastic “glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool to clean them. If this does not clean them properly, use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth. Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used under any circumstances. As the headlights have plastic lenses, you must use anti-U.V. 55 W bulbs. (If any other type of bulb is used, the headlight may be damaged.) It is advisable to carry a set of spare bulbs for emergencies. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A B 3 2 1 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 11 5.11 HEADLIGHTS WITH XENON BULBS: replacing bulbs Dipped beam headlights with Xenon bulbs They are marked by a label 1 on the lens unit A This type of headlight bulb must be changed by a RENAULT Dealer. Bulb type: D2R. A special mounting is required to fit this type of headlight. It is not permitted to fit a headlight fitted with Xenon bulbs to a version which was not designed to receive the unit. Headlight main beam Remove the cover B turning it by a quarter turn. Release spring 2 and take out the bulb. Remove the connector 3 and remove the bulb. Type of halogen bulb: H1 anti UV (see box). Do not touch the glass of the halogen bulb. Hold it by its base. When the bulb has been changed, please refit the cover B As the headlights have plastic lenses, you must use anti-U.V. 55 Wbulbs. (If any other type of bulb is used, the headlight may be damaged.) It is advisable to carry a set of spare bulbs for emergencies. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 A 5 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 12 5.12 HEADLIGHTS WITH XENON BULBS: replacing bulbs (continued) Direction indicators Turn the bulb holder 4 a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Bulb type: orange PY21 W bayonet bulb. Front side lights Remove the cover A by turning it a quarter of a turn. Remove the bulb holder 5 to access the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. Cleaning headlights As the headlights are made of plastic “glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool to clean them. If this does not clean them properly, use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth. Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used under any circumstances. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 13 5.13 HEADLIGHTS: fog lights / additional Front fog lights 1 Changing a bulb and adjusting the headlight beam: Consult your Renault Dealer. Bulb type: H11. Additional lights If you wish to fit fog lights or long range driving lights to your vehicle, consult a Renault Dealer. Any operation on (or modification to) the electrical system must be performed by a Renault Dealer since an incorrect connection might damage the electrical installation (harness, components and in particular the alternator). In addition, your Dealer has available all the parts required for fitting these units. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 4 3 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 14 5.14 REAR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs Indicators/brake and side lights Remove screw 1 in the luggage compartment. From the exterior, release the rear light. Unclip the bulb holder 2 to access the bulbs. 3 Direction indicator light Orange PY21 W bayonet bulb. 4 Side and brake lights Two filament bayonet bulb: P21/5 W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 5 5 6 7 8 9 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 15 q 5.15 REAR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) Rear fog light/reversing light and side lights On the tailgate, unclip the cover 5 from the light unit concerned to access the retaining bolt. Unscrew the retaining bolt. From the exterior, release the rear light. Unclip the bulb holder 6 to access the bulbs. 7 Reversing lights Bayonet bulb P21 W. 8 Side lights Two filament bayonet bulbs P21/5 W. 9 Fog light Bayonet bulb P21 W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 12 11 13 10 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 16 5.16 REAR LIGHTS (continued) AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing bulbs Third brake light 10 Consult your Renault Dealer. Bulb type: W16W. Number plate lights 11 Unclip the light 11 by pressing tab 12. Remove the light cover to gain access to the bulb. Bulb type: festoon C5W. Side mounted indicators 13 Unclip side mounted indicator 13 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver). Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 A 2 3 2 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l7 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 17 5.17 INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs Courtesy light A Unclip cover 1 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb concerned. Bulb type 2: W5W. Bulb type 3: C7W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 B 5 6 5 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l8 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:16 - page 18 q 5.18 INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) Courtesy light B Unclip cover 4 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb concerned. Bulb type 5: W5W. Bulb type 6: C7W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS C 7 8 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.l9 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 19 5.19 INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) Courtesy light C Unclip cover 7 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb. Bulb type 8: C7W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 9 10 11 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:20 Page 5.20 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 20 5.20 INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) Luggage compartment light Unclip the light by pressing tab 9 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver). Disconnect the light. Bulb type: festoon C5W. Front floor lights These are located in the lower section behind the dashboard. Turn the bulb holder 10 through 90° and remove the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. Rear floor lights These are located underneath the front seats. Remove the bulb holder 11 from its mounting and take out the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 13 14 15 12 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.2l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 21 5.21 INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) Door lights Unclip the light 12 (using a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver). Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Bulb type: W5W. Luggage compartment light Unclip the light 13 by pressing the tabs on each side (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver). Disconnect the light. Press tab 14 to release the bulb holder and gain access to the bulb 15. Bulb type: festoon C5W. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 3 2 1 2 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.22 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 22 5.22 FUSES Fuse box 1 If a fault occurs in an electrical component, check first of all that the fuses are sound. Open cover 4. To identify the fuses, refer to label 3 (shown on the page opposite). It is advisable not to use the free fuse locations. Check the fuse in question and replace it if necessary by a fuse of the same rating. If a fuse is fitted where the rating is too high, it may cause the electrical circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the event of an item of equipment using an excessive amount of current. CORRECT INCORRECT Use tweezers to remove the fuse 2. To remove the fuse from the tweezers, slide the fuse to the side. Note: Close the cover again 4 before closing the vehicle door. A sensible precaution: Obtain a box of spare bulbs and fuses from your RENAULT Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.23 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 23 5.23 FUSES (continued) Allocation of fuses (depending on the vehicle equipment level) Symbol Allocation Headlight main beam Electronic management unit/engine immobiliser Voice synthesiser/ Instrument panel/ Xenon headlight remote adjustment Air conditioning/ Parking aid/ Reversing light Interior lighting Brake light/Wipers Left-hand dipped beam headlight Right-hand side light Symbol Allocation Hazard warning lights/Flashers Communication system/Radio Front fog light/Instrument panel/Voice synthesiser Airbags/Pretensioners Anti-lock braking (ABS) Horn Electric windows. Rear fog light De-icing door mirrors Symbol Allocation Right-hand dipped headlight Left-hand side light/ Lighting Wipers Locking/unlocking the doors Passenger compartment accessories socket/ Car phone Cigarette lighter/ Luggage compartment accessories socket Rear screen demisting/ Steering column lock/ Front seats WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A 1 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.24 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 24 5.24 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES The fuses located in the engine compartment must not be handled. As an exception, if it is not possible to stop the engine using the Renault Card, you can use fuse 1 as an “emergency engine stop” function. To do this, lift cover A, remove the projecting fuse 1 from its retainer. Wait a few for approximately 5 seconds then refit the fuse. Note: This will cause the memory for some devices to be lost, such as remote control window closing, the clock, one touch electric windows, etc. It will therefore be necessary to reprogram them. Refer to the information concerned in the notes describing these devices. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.25 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 25 q 5.25 BATTERY: breakdown To avoid all risk of sparks: - Ensure that all consumers are disconnected before disconnecting or reconnecting the battery. - When charging, stop the charger before connecting or disconnecting the battery. - Do not place metal objects on the battery to avoid creating a short circuit between the terminals. Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin. If it should, wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. Keep all flames, red-hot objects and sparks away from the battery as there is a risk of explosion. Take care whenworking inthe engine compartment as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment without warning. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.26 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 26 5.26 BATTERY: breakdown (continued) Connecting a battery charger Both battery leads must be disconnected (engine switched off). Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. Follow the instructions for use given by the manufacturer of the battery charger you are using. Only a well-charged and well-maintained battery will have a long and useful life and enable you to start the car’s engine normally. The battery must be kept clean and dry. Have the battery's charge status checked regularly: • especially if you use your vehicle for short journeys or for frequent driving in town; • When the external temperature drops (in winter), the charge declines. In winter, only use those electrical components which are really necessary. • Finally, you should understand that the charge decreases naturally as a result of certain “permanent consumers” such as: the clock, after sales accessories... When a large number of accessories are fitted to the vehicle, have them connected to + after ignition. In this case, it is advisable to have your vehicle fitted with a battery which has an increased nominal capacity. Consult your Renault Dealer. If your vehicle is to be left stationary for a relatively long time, disconnect the battery or have it recharged regularly, in particular during cold weather. The equipment with a memory, radio and trip computer will then have to be reprogrammed. The battery must be stored in a cool dry place, protected from frost. Specific procedures may be required to charge some batteries. Consult your Renault Dealer. Avoid all risk of sparks which may cause an immediate explosion and charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. Risk of serious injury. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 4 1 A 2 3 B nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.27 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 27 5.27 BATTERY: breakdown (continued) Starting the vehicle using the battery from another vehicle Proceed as follows when starting your vehicle from another vehicle's battery: Obtain suitable jump leads (with a large cross section) from a Renault Dealer or, if you already have jump leads, ensure that they are in perfect condition. The two batteries must have an identical nominal voltage: 12 volts. The battery supplying the current should have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which is at least the same as that of the discharged battery. An iced-up battery must be thawed out before current is supplied to it. Ensure that there is no risk of contact between the two vehicles (risk of short circuiting when the positive terminals are connected) and that the discharged battery is properly connected. Switch off your vehicle ignition. Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and run it at an average speed. Secure the positive cable (+) A to the (+) terminal 1 of the discharged battery, then to the (+) terminal 2 of the battery supplying the current. Secure the negative cable (–) B to the (–) terminal 3 of the battery supplying the current and then to the (–) terminal 4 of the discharged battery. Check that there is no contact between cables A and B and that cable A (+) is not touching any metal parts on the vehicle supplying the current. Start the engine as you would normally. As soon as it starts, disconnect cables A and B in reverse order (4-3-2-1). WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 8 2 4 9 . 2 LO C K + AU TO 1 3 2 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.28 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 28 5.28 RENAULT CARD: BATTERY Replacing the battery Pull firmly on the emergency key 1. Replace battery 2 in accordance with the polarity denoted on the emergency key (check that warning light 3 lights up properly by pressing a button on the RENAULT card). The batteries can be obtained from your RENAULT Dealer. These batteries should last about two years. Do not dump your used batteries in the countryside, give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recycling batteries. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 2 4 3 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.29 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 29 5.29 FITTING A RADIO Fitting a radio Open the cover 1. Unclip the cover 2. The connections are found behind the cover: aerial, + and – supply, speaker wires. Tweeter speakers Unclip grille 3 using a tool such as a screwdriver to gain access to the speaker wires. Door speakers Unclip grille 4 using a tool such as a screwdriver to gain access to the speaker wires. • In all cases, follow the manufacturer's fitting instructions carefully. • The specifications of the brackets and wires (available as a Renault parts accessory) vary depending on the equipment level of your vehicle and the type of radio. Consult your Renault Dealer to find out the correct reference number. • No work may be carried out on the electric circuit of the vehicle, except by Renault engineers: if the system is connected incorrectly, it may result in damage being caused to the electrical installation and/or the units connected to it. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.30 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 30 5.30 ACCESSORIES Using mobile phones and CB equipment. Mobile phones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the original electronic systems fitted to the vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.* Fitting after-sales accessories To ensure the correct operation of your car, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use RENAULT approved accessories because they are suitable for your car and are the only accessories for which RENAULT will provide a warranty. Electrical or electronic accessories • Any work on the electrical systems on the car must be carried out by RENAULT network engineers: if the system is connected incorrectly, it may result in damage being caused to the electrical installation and/or the units connected to it. • If the car is fitted with any after-sales electrical equipment, make sure that the unit is correctly protected by a fuse. Ask for information on the rating and position of this fuse. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 3 4 B A 1 5 6 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.3l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 31 q 5.31 WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES Replacing windscreen wiper blades 1 - Lift the windscreen wiper arm 3 until it stops against the bonnet (the arm cannot be lifted completely). - Move the blade into a horizontal position. - Press tab 2 and slide the wiper blade downwards until hook 4 on the wiper arm is released. - Move the blade (movement A) and then refit it (movement B). To refit To refit the wiper blade, proceed in reverse order to removal. Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position. The windscreen washer jets These can be adjusted using a tool such as a flat screwdriver. • In frosty weather, make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating). • Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year). Rear window wiper 5 - Fully extend the wiper arm 6 ( the arm can not be completely removed); - Move the blade 5 until you meet some resistance. - Remove the blade by pulling on it. To refit To refit the wiper blade, proceed in reverse order to removal. Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 2 4 5 3 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.32 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 32 q 5.32 TOWING: breakdown Insert the Renault Card in the card reader completely to unlock the steering wheel and to use the indicator lights (stop lights, indicators...). The towed vehicle's lights must be switched on at night. It is also important to observe the towing conditions defined by the legislation for the particular country you are in. Do not exceed the towing weight for your vehicle. Consult your Renault Dealer. Only use the front 1 and rear 4 towing points (never use the driveshafts). These towing points may only be used for pulling the vehicle, never for lifting it either directly or indirectly. Access to towing points Unclip cover 2 or 5 First screw in the towing ring 3 by hand as far as it will go. Then finish tightening it using the wheelbrace from the tool kit. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 3 nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.33 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 33 5.33 TOWING: breakdown (continued) - Renault specifies the use of a rigid towing bar. If a rope or cable is used (where the law allows this), the vehicle being towed must be able to brake. - A vehicle must not be towed if it is not fit to be driven. - Do not accelerate or brake suddenly when towing, as this may result in damage being caused to the vehicle. - When towing a vehicle, do not exceed 15 mph (25 km/h). Towing a vehicle with automatic transmission: special information Engine switched off: The transmission is no longer lubricated. It is preferable to tow this type of vehicle on a trailer or tow it with the front wheels off the ground. In exceptional cases, you can tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground for a maximum distance of 30 miles (50 km). The selector lever must be in neutral (position N). If the lever 1 becomes jammed in the P position, even though you are pressing down the brake pedal, the lever can be released manually. To do this, undo the upper section of the gaiter 3. Press the button located underneath the gaiter and at the same time press the unlocking button 2 to move the lever from position P. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS A nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.34 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 34 5.34 TOWING (attachments) Permissible nose weight when towing a trailer, max. towing weight, braked and unbraked: Refer to the information on “Weights” in section 6. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for information on how to fit and operate the towing attachment. Note: Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documentation. A: 917 mm WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.35 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 35 5.35 FAULTS Your vehicle should not be affected by faults likely to keep it off the road for long if you have followed the Renault Servicing Programme regularly. The following hints will enable you to get going again quickly, albeit temporarily. For reasons of safety you should always consult a Renault Dealer as soon as you can. When starter is activated CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • There is no response, the warning lights fail to light up and the starter does not turn. Battery lead disconnected or terminals oxidised. Check battery terminals: scrape clean if oxidised and re-tighten. Battery discharged. Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Battery unserviceable. Change battery. Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is locked. • Warning light bulbs go dim and starter turns very slowly. Battery terminals not tight. Terminals oxidised. Check battery terminals: scrape clean if oxidised and re-tighten. Battery discharged. Connect another battery to the faulty battery. • The engine is difficult to start in damp weather or after washing. Poor ignition, ignition system damp. Dry spark plug leads and ignition coil. • The engine is difficult to start when hot. Faulty carburation (bubbles of vaporised fuel in circuit). Let the engine cool down. Poor compression. Consult a Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.36 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 36 5.36 FAULTS (continued) When starter is activated CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • The engine is difficult to start or will not stop. Electronic problem. Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” information in section 5: proceed as indicated for the “emergency engine stop” function. • The Steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine start-up button (see the Starting the engine information in section 2). Electronic problem. Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” information in section 5: proceed as indicated for the “emergency engine stop” function. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.37 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 37 5.37 FAULTS (continued) On the open road CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • Abnormal white smoke from the exhaust. Mechanical defect: cylinder head gasket blown. Stop the engine. Consult a Renault Dealer. • Vibrations. Incorrect tyre pressures, incorrectly balanced or damaged. Check tyre pressures. If this is not the problem, have them checked by a Renault Dealer. • Coolant boiling in expansion bottle. Mechanical defect: cylinder head gasket blown, faulty water pump. Stop the engine. Consult a Renault Dealer. Engine cooling fan not working. Check appropriate fuse, otherwise consult a Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.38 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 38 5.38 FAULTS (continued) On the open road CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • Smoke under the bonnet. Short circuit Stop, turn the ignition off, disconnect the battery. Coolant circuit fault Consult a Renault Dealer. • The oil pressure warning light lights up: - when cornering or braking Oil level too low. Top up the oil. - on idling Oil pressure too low. Consult the nearest Renault Dealer. - is slow to go out or remains lit up on acceleration. Loss of oil pressure. Stop: call for assistance from Renault Dealer. • Engine loses power. Clogged air filter. Change element. Fuel supply faulty. Check fuel level. Faulty spark plugs Consult a Renault Dealer. • Idling unsteady or engine stalls. Poor compression (spark plugs, ignition, air leak). Consult a Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.39 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 39 5.39 FAULTS (continued) On the open road CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • Steering becomes hard to turn. Belt broken. Have the belt replaced. Lack of oil in pump. Top up the oil (see maintenance section). If the problem persists, consult a Renault Dealer. • The engine overheats. The coolant temperature indicator light lights up (or the gauge needle moves into the red zone). Water pump: belt stretched or broken. Faulty engine cooling fan. Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Consult a Renault Dealer. Coolant leaks. Check the condition of hoses and clips. Check the expansion bottle: it should contain coolant. If it does not, top it up (having let it cool down). Take care not to scald yourself. This action is only temporary: consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. Radiator: Never fill a hot radiator with cold coolant if a considerable quantity has been lost. After any operation on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved by Renault's Technical Department may be used for this purpose. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.40 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 40 5.40 FAULTS (continued) Electrical equipment CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free blades before use. Fuse blown (intermittent, park). Replace fuse. Motor faulty. Consult a Renault Dealer. • Indicators flash more rapidly. - Bulb blown. Replace the bulb. • Direction indicators not flashing. On one side: - Bulb blown. Replace bulb. - Feed wire disconnected or connector out of position. Reconnect wire. - Faulty earth connection. Find earth wire and remake a good clean wire-to-earth connection. On both sides: - Fuse blown. Replace fuse. - Flasher unit defective. Replace: consult a Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.4l NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 41 5.41 FAULTS (continued) Electrical equipment CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTION • Headlights not working. One: - Bulb blown. Replace bulb. -Wire disconnected or connector out of position. Check and reconnect wire or connector. - Faulty earth connection. See above. Both: - If circuit is fused: Check fuse and change if necessary. • Traces of condensation in the lights. This is not a fault. The presence of traces of condensation in lights is a natural phenomenon linked to the variations in temperature. These traces will disappear rapidly once the lights are switched on. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G5.qxd l5/05/02 l5:2l Page 5.42 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T5.WIN 31/7/2002 10:17 - page 42 5.42 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.05 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:55 - page 5 6.05 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Versions 1.6 16V 1.8 16V 2.0 16V 2.0 IDE 3.0 V6 1.9 dCi 2.2 dCi Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0A BG0L BG0U BG0B BG0C BG0J BG0M BG0V BG04 BG05 BG06 BG0W BG0K BG0O BG0S BG03 BG0H BG0N BG0P BG0D BG0Y BG01 BG02 BG0E BG0G BG0R BG07 BG08 BG0F BG09 Engine type (see engine plate) K4M F4P F4R F5R L7X F9Q turbo G9T turbo Bore x Stroke (mm) 79.5×80.5 82.7×83 82.7×93 87×82.5 80×93 87×92 Capacity (cc) 1 598 1 783 1 998 2 946 1 870 2 188 Type of fuel Unleaded petrol Diesel Spark plugs Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehicle’s engine. The type should be marked on a label stuck inside the engine compartment. If it is not then contact your Renault Dealer. Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may damage the engine. – WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.06 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 6 6.06 WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options, likely to change in the course of the model year. Consult your Renault Dealer. Petrol versions 1.6 16V 1.8 16V 2.0 16V Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0A - BG0L - BG0U BG0B - BG0C - BG0J BG0M - - BG04 - BG05 - BG06 - BG0V BG0W - BG0K Automatic Automatic Automatic Kerb weight Total Front Rear 1 270 1 300 1 280 1 315 1 280 1 315 780 810 800 830 800 830 490 490 480 485 480 485 Max. permissible axle weight Front Rear 1 070 1 030 Max. permissible all-up weight 1 835 1 885 1 865 1 900 1 865 1 900 Max. permissible towing weight unbraked 650 Max. permissible towing weight braked (1) driver only 1 300 other cases 950 950 900 950 900 950 Total train weight (= Max. permissible all-up weight and trailer) 2 800 2 850 2 800 2 850 2 800 2 850 Permissible nose weight 75 Max. permissible load on roof rack 80 (including the carrying equipment) (1) Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.) It is important to comply with the towing weights governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, those laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. Consult your Renault Dealer about any towing equipment.Under no circumstances may the total train weight (= Maximum. permissible all-up weight plus weight towed) be exceeded. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.07 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 7 6.07 WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options, likely to change in the course of the model year depending on the country of marketing Consult your Renault Dealer. 2.0 16V 2.0 IDE 3.0 V6 BG0O BG0S - BG03 BG0H - BG0N - BG0P BG0D BG0Y BG01 BG02 Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 1 295 1 330 1 320 1 340 1 300 1 320 1 430 1 445 810 840 840 855 815 835 945 955 485 490 480 485 485 485 485 490 1 070 1 135 1 030 1 030 1 880 1 915 1 905 1 925 1 885 1 910 1 980 1 995 650 1 300 1 500 900 900 900 950 900 900 1 150 2 800 2 850 2 850 2 875 2 800 2 850 3 150 75 80 (including the carrying equipment) - If your vehicle is already at full load (maximum. permissible all-up weight), the maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar. - The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10% at an altitude of 1000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1000 metres thereafter. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.08 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 8 6.08 WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options, likely to change in the course of the model year. Consult your Renault Dealer. Diesel versions 1.9 dCi 2.2 dCi Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0G - BG0R BG07 - BG08 BG0E BG0E - BG07 BG0F - BG09 Automatic Automatic Kerb weight Total Front Rear 1 350 1 315 1 345 1 490 1 520 865 830 855 980 1 010 485 485 490 510 510 Max. permissible axle weight Front Rear 1 070 1 190 1 030 1 030 Max. permissible all-up weight 1 935 1 880 1 930 2 040 2 070 Max. permissible towing weight unbraked 650 Max. permissible towing weight braked (1) driver only 1 500 other cases 1 150 1 100 Total train weight (= Max. permissible all-up weight and trailer) 3 100 3 050 3 100 3 200 Permissible nose weight 75 Max. permissible load on roof rack 80 (including the carrying equipment) WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.09 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 9 6.09 WEIGHTS (continued) (1) Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.) - It is important to comply with the towing weights governed by local legislation in each country and in particular laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. Consult your Renault Dealer about any attachments. Under no circumstances may the total train weight (= max. permissible all-up weight and weight towed) be exceeded. - If your vehicle is already at full load (max. permissible all-up weight), the maximum speed must be limited to 60mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar. - The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximumload be reduced by 10% at an altitude of 1000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1000 metres thereafter. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l0 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 10 6.10 Replacement parts and repairs Original Renault parts are based on a strict specification and are regularly tested. Therefore, they are of at least the same level of quality as the originally fitted part. If you always fit Renault genuine parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Repairs carried out using original parts in the Renault network are guaranteed for one year. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.ll NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 11 ALPHABETICAL INDEX A ABS ................................................................. 2.22 - 2.23 Accessories ................................................................ 5.30 Additional headlights .............................................. 5.13 Adjusting your driving position ............................. 1.23 Air conditioning .......................................... 3.04 ¬ 3.19 Air vents ........................................................ 3.02 - 3.03 Airbag (deactivating passenger airbag) ........ 1.40 - 1.41 Airbag ........................................................... 1.27 ¬ 1.33 Anti-lock braking system .............................. 2.22 - 2.23 Anti-pollution (advice) ................................. 2.05 - 2.06 Ashtrays .................................................................... 3.34 Audible and visual warnings .................................. 1.82 Automatic gearbox (use) ............................. 2.32 ¬ 2.34 Automatic gearbox selector lever ............... 2.32 ¬ 2.34 B Battery ................................................ 4.12 - 5.25 ¬ 5.27 Bonnet ............................................................ 4.02 - 4.03 Brake fluid ................................................................ 4.11 Brief overview .......................................................... 0.02 Bulbs (changing) .......................................... 5.09 ¬ 5.21 Bulbs ............................................................. 5.09 ¬ 5.21 Buzzer (lights on) .......................................... 1.10 - 1.83 C Catalytic converter ................................................... 2.04 Changing a wheel ..................................................... 5.05 Child restraint system ................................. 1.34 ¬ 1.45 Child safety ......................................... 1.04 - 1.11 - 1.30 - 1.34 ¬ 1.45 - 3.20 - 3.21 - 3.25 Children ....................... 1.04 - 1.11 - 1.30 - 1.34 ¬ 1.45 - 3.20 - 3.21 - 3.25 Cigarette lighter ........................................................ 3.34 Clock .......................................................................... 1.78 Controls ........................................................ 1.46 ¬ 1.49 Coolant ...................................................................... 4.09 Courtesy mirrors ....................................................... 3.24 Cruise control - speed limiter .................... 2.25 ¬ 2.30 Cruise control ............................................... 2.28 ¬ 2.30 D Dashboard ..................................................... 1.46 ¬ 1.49 Deactivating front passenger airbags ............ 1.40 - 1.41 Demisting: Rear screen ................................. 3.07 - 3.14 Windscreen ................................. 3.07 - 3.15 Dimensions ............................................................... 6.04 Dipstick ........................................................ 4.05 ¬ 4.07 Door locking ................................................. 1.09 ¬ 1.14 Doors/tailgate lid .............................. 1.10 ¬ 1.14 - 3.36 Driver’s position ........................................... 1.46 ¬ 1.49 Driver's seat memory ............................................... 1.22 Driving .......................................................... 2.02 ¬ 2.34 E Electronic stability program: ESP ................ 2.18 - 2.19 Emergency brake assist ............................................ 2.24 Emergency spare wheel ........................................... 5.02 Engine (technical specifications) ............................ 6.05 Engine immobiliser ....................................... 1.15 - 1.16 Engine oil .................................................................. 4.08 Engine oil capacity ................................................... 4.08 Engine oil change ..................................................... 4.08 Engine specifications ............................................... 6.05 Engine starter/stop button ............................ 2.02 - 2.03 Environment ............................................................. 2.11 ESP: Electronic stability program ................ 2.18 - 2.19 Exterior temperature ................................................ 1.78 External lighting and signals ...................... 1.83 ¬ 1.85 F Faults (operating faults) .............................. 5.35 ¬ 5.41 Filter: Air filter ......................................................... 4.12 Oil filter ......................................................... 4.08 Fitting a radio ................................................ 5.29 - 5.30 Fog lights ........................................................ 1.84 - 5.13 Front seat adjustment with: Electrical controls .................................. 1.21 - 1.22 Manual controls ................................................ 1.19 Front seat belt pretensioners ........................ 1.27 - 1.31 Front seats (adjustment) .............................. 1.17 ¬ 1.22 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l2 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 12 ALPHABETICAL INDEX F Fuel (economy advice) .................................. 2.05 - 2.06 Fuel (filling) ................................................... 1.89 - 1.90 Fuel (grade) .................................................... 1.89 - 1.90 Fuel economy .............................................. 2.08 ¬ 2.10 Fuel filler cap ................................................ 1.89 - 1.90 Fuel level ..................................................... 1.50 ¬ 1.75 Fuel tank capacity ......................................... 1.89 - 1.90 Fuses ............................................................. 5.22 ¬ 5.24 G Gear (changing) ........................................................ 2.06 Gear lever .................................................................. 2.06 Glove box ..................................................... 3.29 ¬ 3.31 H Handbrake ................................................................. 2.07 Hazard warning lights .............................................. 1.82 Head rest ........................................................ 1.17 - 1.18 Headlights (adjusting) .............................................. 1.85 Headlights .................................................... 5.09 ¬ 5.13 Heated seats .............................................................. 1.20 Heating ......................................................... 3.04 ¬ 3.19 Hubcap spanner ....................................................... 5.03 Hubcaps .................................................................... 5.04 I Ignition switch ............................................... 2.02 - 2.03 Indicator lights ............................................. 1.75 ¬ 1.50 Indicators: direction indicators ............................... 1.82 instrument panel ...................... 1.50 ¬ 1.75 Indicators ............... 1.82 - 5.10 - 5.12 - 5.14 Instruments ............................... 1.50 ¬ 1.75 Interior lights ...... 3.27 - 3.28 - 5.17 ¬ 5.21 J Jack ............................................................................ 5.03 L Lashing rings ............................................................ 3.38 Levels ............................................................ 4.05 ¬ 4.12 Lifting the vehicle (changing a wheel) ................... 5.05 Lights: brake lights ........................................ 5.14 - 5.16 dipped beam headlights ........ 1.83 - 5.10 - 5.11 direction indicator lights .............. 1.82 - 5.10 - 5.12 - 5.14 - 5.16 fog lights ................................. 1.84 - 5.13 - 5.15 hazard warning lights .................................. 1.82 main beam headlights ........... 1.83 - 5.10 - 5.11 number plate lights ..................................... 5.16 reversing lights ............................................. 5.15 side lights ............................. 1.83 - 5.10 ¬ 5.15 adjusting ....................................................... 1.85 Lighting: exterior ......................................... 1.83 ¬ 1.85 interior ........................................... 3.27 - 3.28 instrument panel ...................................... 1.83 Locking the doors ........................................ 1.02 ¬ 1.14 Luggage compartment ................................. 3.36 ¬ 3.39 MMaintenance: Bodywork ............................... 4.13 - 4.14 Interior trim ...................................... 4.15 Mechanics ............................. 4.04 ¬ 4.12 Map reading lights ........................................ 3.27 - 3.28 O Operating faults ........................................... 5.35 ¬ 5.41 P Paintwork (maintenance) .............................. 4.13 - 4.14 Paintwork (reference) ............................................... 6.02 Parking assistance .................................................... 2.31 Power assisted steering ................................. 2.07 - 4.10 Power assisted steering pump ................................. 4.10 Power steering .......................................................... 2.07 Practical advice ............................................ 2.08 ¬ 2.10 Puncture ....................................................... 5.02 ¬ 5.05 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l3 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 13 ALPHABETICAL INDEX R Radio (pre-fitting) .......................................... 5.29 - 5.30 Radio installation .......................................... 5.29 - 5.30 Rear bench seat ........................................................ 3.35 Rear parcel shelf ...................................................... 3.37 Rear seats (operation) .............................................. 3.35 Rear window (demisting) ............................. 3.07 - 3.14 Rear-view mirrors .......................................... 1.80 - 1.81 Renault Card: battery ............................................... 5.28 RENAULT Card: use ................................... 1.02 ¬ 1.09 Replacement parts ................................................... 6.10 Replacing bulbs ........................................... 5.09 ¬ 5.21 Reverse gear (selecting) ........................................... 2.06 Running in ................................................................ 2.02 S Seat belts ...................................................... 1.23 ¬ 1.26 Side repeaters ........................................................... 5.16 Spare key ....................................................... 1.03 - 1.05 Speakers (location) ........................................ 5.29 - 5.30 Speed limiter ............................................... 2.25 ¬ 2.27 Starting the engine ........................................ 2.02 - 2.03 Steering wheel (adjusting) ....................................... 1.79 Storage compartments ...................... 3.29 ¬ 3.33 - 3.38 Sun visor .................................................................. 3.24 Sunroof .......................................................... 3.25 - 3.26 T Tanks: Brake fluid .................................................... 4.11 Coolant .......................................................... 4.09 Fuel tank (capacity) ..................................... 1.89 Windscreen washer reservoir ...................... 4.12 Technical specifications .............................. 6.02 ¬ 6.10 T Temperature regulation ............................... 3.11 ¬ 3.18 Towing (breakdown) ..................................... 5.32 - 5.33 Towing (towing a caravan) ...................................... 5.34 Towing a caravan ........................................ 6.06 ¬ 6.09 Towing rings .................................................. 5.32 - 5.33 Towing weights ........................................... 6.06 ¬ 6.09 Traction control system ................................ 2.20 - 2.21 Transporting objects in the luggage compartment 3.39 Trip computer .............................................. 1.72 ¬ 1.75 Tyre pressure ............... 0.04 - 0.05 - 2.12 ¬ 2.17 - 5.07 Tyre pressure monitor ................................. 2.12 ¬ 2.17 Tyres ................ 0.04 - 0.05 - 2.12 ¬ 2.17 - 5.06 ¬ 5.08 V Variable power assisted steering ............................ 2.07 Vehicle identification .................................... 6.02 - 6.03 Vehicle identification plates ........................ 6.02 - 6.03 Ventilation ................................ 3.02 - 3.03 - 3.06 - 3.17 Voice synthesiser ........................................... 1.76 - 1.77 W Warning display .......................................... 1.66 ¬ 1.71 Washers ............................................. 1.86 ¬ 1.88 - 4.12 Washing ......................................................... 4.13 - 4.14 Weights ......................................................... 6.06 ¬ 6.09 Wheelbrace ............................................................... 5.03 Wheels (safety) ............................................ 5.06 ¬ 5.08 Window winder ........................................... 3.20 ¬ 3.23 Windscreen ............................................................... 3.23 Windscreen wipers (blades) .................................... 5.31 Wiper blades ............................................................ 5.31 Wipers .......................................................... 1.86 ¬ 1.88 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l4 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 14 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l5 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 15 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS nu633~6_fra_G6.qxd 29/05/02 l0:23 Page 6.l6 NU633-6 - B74 C:\Documentum\Checkout\nu633-6_eng_T6.WIN 30/7/2002 14:56 - page 16 The driver's handbook — 82 00 268 996 — NU 633-6 — April 2002 — Edition anglaise CRÉ AT E UR D' AUT OMOBI L E S WWW.MANUALS.WS RENA ULT recom m ends WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS Brief overview • Tyre pressures .............................................................................................. 0.04 - 0.05 • Renault Card: use ...................................................................................... 1.02 • Child restraints .......................................................................................... 1.34 • Warning lights (instrument panel) .......................................................... 1.50 • Driving ........................................................................................................ 2.02 Tyre pressure monitor .......................................................................... 2.12 1.09 1.45 1.75 2.34 2.17 • Starting/stopping the engine ...................................................................... 2.02 - 2.03 Electronic Stability Program: ESP ........................................................ 2.18 - 2.19 Traction control system ......................................................................... 2.20 - 2.21 Emergency brake assistance ............................................................................. 2.24 Cruise control/speed limiter ................................................................ 2.25 • Heating/air conditioning ........................................................................... 3.02 • Bonnet/maintenance .................................................................................. 4.02 • Practical advice (replacing bulbs, fuses, breakdown, faults) ............... 5.02 2.30 3.19 4.15 5.42 Parking aid ......................................................................................................... 2.31 WWW.MANUALS.WS 0.02 C WWW.MANUALS.WST O N T E N ..................................................................... S Sections Getting to know your car Driving 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ............................................................................................................... Your comfort Maintenance ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. Practical advice ........................................................................................... Technical specifications Alphabetical index ........................................................................ .................................................................................... WWW.MANUALS.WS 0.03 BG0Y BG01 .5 2.TYRE PRESSURES (in bar or kg/cm² when cold) Saloon versions WWW.205/60 R 16 V .BG03 .2 2.3 (1) 2.1 2.WS 1.0 16V 2.8 16V 2.6.3 Type (see vehicle identification plate) Non-motorway use • Front • Rear Motorway use (2) • Front • Rear Spare wheel Wheel sizes (3) Tyre sizes (3) 2.2 2.5 2. The maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 2.BG0C BG0E .6 16V .BG0L .BG0P .0 2.1 2.7 2.1 bar at the front.WS 0. the conditions under which chains may be fitted to the vehicle.BG0H .BG0R BG07 2. (2) Special note concerning vehicles used at full load (maximum permissible all-up weight) and towing a trailer.0 (1) 2.BG0B .7 6.BG0S BG0U .9 dCi 3. WWW.225/45 R 17 V Tyre safety and use of chains Refer to the Tyres paragraph in section 5 for information on maintenance and.1.2 bar.3 (1) 2. Refer to the Weights paragraph in section 6 for more details.2 2.BG09 BG0A .1.205/55 R 16 V .MANUALS.0 V6 BG0D .04 .3 2.BG0J BG0K .9 dCi BG0G .BG0W BG00 .7 2. depending on the version.MANUALS.BG0V .BG04 BG05 .BG0M BG0N .BG02 1.2 2.5 J 15 .7 (1) 2.1 2.7 J 17 195/65 R 15 H .BG08 2. (1) Vehicles with automatic gearbox: add 0.5 J 16 . (3) The wheel rim and tyre sizes depend on the version and country in which it is sold.2 dCi BG0F .0 IDE .BG06 . BG0Y BG01 .6.BG0C BG0E .5 J 16 . (1) Vehicles with automatic gearbox: add 0. WWW.BG0S BG0U . (2) Special note concerning vehicles used at full load (maximum permissible all-up weight) and towing a trailer.BG02 1.9 dCi 3.5 J 15 .WS 0.2 dCi BG0F .1.BG0R BG07 2.0 V6 BG0D .9 dCi BG0G .BG0H .MANUALS.BG0J BG0K .BG0W BG00 .BG0L .BG09 BG0A .BG0V .WS 1.225/45 R 17 V Tyre safety and use of chains Refer to the Tyres paragraph in section 5 for information on maintenance and.BG06 .TYRE PRESSURES (in PSI when cold) Saloon versions WWW.05 . (3) The wheel rim and tyre sizes depend on the version and country in which it is sold.BG0M BG0N . depending on the version.BG08 29 (1) 29 33 (1) 32 33 Type (see vehicle identification plate) Non-motorway use • Front • Rear Motorway use (2) • Front • Rear Spare wheel Wheel sizes (3) Tyre sizes (3) 33 30 39 32 39 32 30 36 32 36 33 (1) 30 39 (1) 32 39 6. the conditions under which chains may be fitted to the vehicle.0 16V 2.BG04 BG05 .205/60 R 16 V .MANUALS.1 bar at the front.0 IDE .2 bar.6 16V .8 16V 2.BG03 .205/55 R 16 V .BG0P .BG0B .7 J 17 195/65 R 15 H . Refer to the Weights paragraph in section 6 for more details. The maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.1. MANUALS.WS 0.WWW.WS WWW.06 .MANUALS. .............................................................................02 Doors .................................89 - WWW...........26 1................................................................................ lateral ...........10 Engine immobiliser system ................................79 1....................... 1.... 1.............................................. 1.14 1..........................46 Instruments ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1...............71 1....16 1.......................82 1.......................32 1.......................Seats . 1...... Wipers / washers .........................72 Voice synthesiser ...33 1...............MANUALS.......MANUALS....................................................................................30 1.......................75 1. 1...................................................................................................................................................86 Fuel tank (filling with fuel) ..................................................................83 Headlight beam adjustment ....................................................................................................................................................... Lighting and external signals ..................WS RENAULT Card: general information..................................01 .......................40 Driver’s position ................................................................................. deadlocking ...................................................................................................................................... use............. 1..78 1................. Child safety ............. 1......90 1.......................85 1................................27 rear seat belts ...............09 1.......................................................................66 Trip computer ...................................... 1....17 Seat belts .............WS 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 1..............................................................................................34 Deactivating front passenger airbag ............................. 1............... 1.85 1.......................77 1...................................................................................................................................................................... Steering wheel .................................................88 1..........................................................................81 1............................................Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle WWW..................................23 Additional methods of restraint ................50 Information display ..................... 1...................................49 1..45 1....... 1....76 Clock and external temperature ........................................................31 1...................................................................................27 front seat belts ...................................................22 1....75 1............................................................................ 1... 1.. Rear-view mirrors .............................................. 1..................................80 Audible and visible signals ..................................................... 1...15 Head rests ..................................................................................................................................................................................41 1.................... operation of certain devices (e.depending on the vehicle.g.openings (doors.02 . electrically controlled seats. .WS 1.Renault Card: general information 18249 WWW.). A 1 2 Plip remote control Renault Card A This can be recognised by the presence of buttons 1 and 2.: radio. WWW. .MANUALS.WS It allows: ..the engine to be started (see section 2.MANUALS. automatic closure of windows and the sunroof (see “Electric window with automatic closing” and “Sunroof” paragraphs in section 3). “Starting the engine” paragraph). .. tailgate) and the fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked (see the following pages). the openings (doors. .: radio.2 WWW. tailgate) and fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked automatically if required. pull firmly on the key. 2 and 3 Emergency key 4 This is only used in exceptional circumstances: it can only be used to unlock the left-hand side door (if the Renault Card battery is flat. See the “Locking/unlocking the doors” paragraph in section 1 for how to use the key.g.depending on the vehicle. “Starting the engine” paragraph).03 18249. automatic closure of windows and the sunroof (see “Electric window with automatic closing” and “Sunroof” paragraphs in section 3).. .).MANUALS.MANUALS. It is inserted in the Renault Card. . . WWW...WS It allows: . . To remove it from its mounting.1 K LOC+ O T AU 3 B K LOC+ O T AU 4 1 2 Renault Card in hands free mode B This can be recognised by the presence of buttons 1.openings and the fuel filler flap to be locked or unlocked intentionally (see the following pages).starting the engine (see section 2. the car battery is discharged.Renault Card: general information (continued) 18249...).WS 1.operation of certain devices (e. electrically controlled seats. MANUALS. for exam ple the electric windows could trap part of the body (neck. WWW.1 WWW. It is therefore important to take care when handling the Renault Card that you do not inadvertently lock or unlock the doors.MANUALS. A 5 B 5 Renault Cards A and B are supplied by a battery which should be replaced when the battery warning light 5 no longer lights up (see “Renault Card: battery” paragraph in section 5) Special note: for some vehicles. electrical seat adjustments (if stored). the position of the rear view mirrors.Renault Card: general information (continued) 18249 18249.04 . automatic air conditioning settings. etc. This could lead to the engine being started or the electrical equipment being operated. hands. arms. Risk of serious injury. etc.).WS 1. the Renault Card records settings selected by the card user: certain radio pre-sets. It is therefore recommended that you keep the same Renault Card at all times so that you can recall your personal settings.WS K LOC+ O T AU Plip remote control range This varies according to the environment. A vehicle can only have one hands-free RENAULT Card. The other RENAULT Cards are remote control cards. you can obtain one from your Dealer.MANUALS.RENAULT CARD: general information (continued) 18249.WS 1.If a RENAULT Card is replaced. WWW. need for an additional RENAULT Card If you lose your RENAULT Card or require another.05 .You can use up to four RENAULT cards per vehicle. Make sure that the batteries are always in good condition: they have a service life of approximately two years. K LOC+ O T AU 4 Special circumstances Interference may be caused by the operation of the RENAULT Card by factors in the immediate vicinity (external installations or the use of equipment operating on the same frequency as the RENAULT Card). Faulty RENAULT Card. . See the RENAULT Card: batteries paragraph in Section 5. .MANUALS. .WS Replacement. In this case. it will be necessary to take the vehicle to your RENAULT Dealer because both the vehicle and all the RENAULT Cards are needed to initialise the system. use the emergency key 4 to open the vehicle (see the “Locking/unlocking the doors” paragraph).2 WWW. WS 1. WWW. the hazard warning lights will not flash. such as in a back pocket where you might sit on it.If the driver's door is open or not closed properly.06 . Special note (for some countries): .WS Press the locking button 2. the doors and tailgate will not be locked and the hazard warning lights will not flash. 1 2 Unlocking the doors Press the unlocking button 1.MANUALS.If one of the doors or the tailgate is open or not closed properly.MANUALS.PLIP REMOTE CONTROL RENAULT Card: use Locking the doors 18249 WWW.The driver's door only can be opened by pressing button 1. . Advice Do not keep your RENAULT Card in a place where it could be bent or damaged accidentally. The hazard warning lights flash once to indicate that the doors have been unlocked. The hazard warning lights flash twice to indicate that the doors have been locked. . .All the doors can be opened by pressing button 1 a second time. Note: .1 WWW. press button 3 to lock the doors.WS 1. Automatic mode is functional again after approximately 3 seconds. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the side repeaters light up (for approximately ten seconds) to indicate that the doors have been locked. the locks will open automatically.MANUALS.WS Locking the doors With the doors closed and carrying your Renault Card walk away from your vehicle: the doors will lock automatically. you can check that they are locked by pulling one of the handles. You can select the beep from a list of different tones or you can suppress it: consult your Renault Dealer. The hazard warning lights flash once to indicate that the doors have been unlocked. Note: the locking distance for your vehicle depends on the environment. . K LOC+ O T AU 3 Voluntary locking using the hands-free mode The doors and tailgate can be locked instantly by pressing button 3 and. Never leave your vehicle with the Renault Card still inside it. WWW. use button 2 to lock it. A beep also sounds.07 . 1 2 Hands-free mode Unlocking the doors Walk up to your vehicle carrying your Renault Card. As soon as you touch one of the handles (doors or tailgate) with your hand.it is recommended that you use button 2 to lock the vehicle to save the battery charge if you will not be using it for some time (more than 3 weeks).if the Renault Card is still close to the vehicle. Special note: for vehicles not equipped with the automatic plip remote control unit door locking function (for some countries).MANUALS.RENAULT CARD IN HANDS-FREE MODE: use 18249. MANUALS.WS Returning to hands-free mode to return Press button 3 hands-free mode.RENAULT CARD IN HANDS-FREE MODE: use (continued) 18249.WS 1. some objects can cause interference and hinder the operation of the system.1 WWW. 1 2 Operation in manual mode If you wish you can exit the hands free mode by pressing key 1 or 2: you will then be in manual mode and the Renault Card can be used following the method described in the “Plip remote control unit Renault Card: use” section. such as in a back pocket where you might sit on it.MANUALS.08 . Advice Do not keep your RENAULT Card in a place where it could be bent or damaged accidentally. to K LOC+ O T AU 3 Interference When held close to the card. WWW. press button 2 or 3 once continuously. WWW. by breaking the window and then trying to open the door from the inside). Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the side lights are lit. Never use deadlocking if someone is still inside the vehicle.DEADLOCKING K LOC+ O T AU 3 2 2 Deadlocking the doors and tailgate (for some countries) This allows you to lock the doors and tailgate and to prevent the doors from being unlocked using the interior handles (for example. .press button 2 or 3 twice briefly.WS .1 18249 WWW.MANUALS.09 18249. The hazard warning lights flash four times to indicate that the doors have been locked.MANUALS. To activate deadlocking: .WS 1. WS 1.WS 2 1 Opening the doors from the outside Once the doors have been unlocked using the RENAULT Card. Opening the doors from the inside Pull handle 2. grasp the handle 1 and pull it towards you to open the door. Lights on warning buzzer A warning buzzer will sound when a door is opened if you have left the lights switched on after turning off the ignition (to prevent discharge of the battery. WWW.10 . etc).MANUALS.MANUALS.OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS WWW. Other cases Move lever 4 on each door and check from the inside that both doors are securely locked.WS 4 3 Child safety Vehicles fitted with switch 3 with integral indicator light Press switch 3 to prevent operation of the rear electric windows and opening of the rear doors. to make it impossible for the rear doors to be opened from inside.MANUALS.MANUALS.11 .OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (continued) WWW. WWW. If there is a fault. you will hear a beep and the indicator light will not light up. The indicator light built into the switch lights up to confirm that the doors are locked.WS 1. It can only be opened from the inside.WS 1. locked from the exterior. Turn screw 3 when the door is open (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) and close the door again. however. WWW. This is done using the Renault Card: see the “Renault Card” information in section 1. Insert the spare key 2 in the lock and unlock. Faults The doors can be locked manually if there is an electrical fault. This is.MANUALS.MANUALS.LOCKING / UNLOCKING THE DOORS WWW.WS 3 A 1 2 Locking/unlocking outside from the Special circumstance: using the emergency key 2 Remove cover A at the notch 1 (using the end of the emergency key). Open the door.12 . When the opening elements are open or not properly closed. etc. indicator light 5 built into switch 4 and indicator light 6 show the locking status of the opening elements: . With the ignition on.MANUALS.When the opening elements are locked. 4 6 5 Locking/unlocking interior from the Opening element indicator light status Electric central locking This allows all the openings (doors.WS 1. indicator light 5 remains lit up for approximately one minute and then goes out when you lock the doors using the card.LOCKING / UNLOCKING THE DOORS (continued) WWW. indicator lights 5 and 6 are lit up.13 . WWW. fuel filler trap. .) to be controlled simultaneously. indicator lights 5 and 6 are not lit up.WS With the ignition switched off.MANUALS. If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving. The front door mechanism cannot be locked if the door is open. remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to your vehicle in the event of an emergency. tailgate. Lock them by pressing switch 4 (padlock side). warning light 2 incorporated in the button 1 and warning light 3 do not light up when the doors are locked.by pressing the door unlocking button 1. 5 seconds.MANUALS.. press the central door locking button 1 on the locking side (padlock side) for approx. remember that it may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to your vehicle in the event of an emergency. until you hear the beep. 5 seconds. The door is unlocked .when the vehicle is stationary by opening a front door. If they are closed correctly. 6 mph (10 km/h).. consult your Renault Dealer. .AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING WHEN DRIVING You can decide to activate this function if you wish. WWW. WWW. If you decide to keep the doors locked when you are driving. Faults If you note a fault (no automatic locking.MANUALS. To activate it With the ignition on. until you hear the beep.WS 1 3 2 Operating principle When the vehicle moves off. Note: A door that is opened will automatically be locked again when the vehicle reaches a speed of approx. the system automatically locks the doors as soon as a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) is attained. To deactivate it With the ignition on. press the central door locking button 1 on the unlocking side (opposite the padlock) for approx.14 .) first check that that all the doors are closed properly.WS 1. WS 1. indicator light 1 will flash continuously. indicator light 1 and the reader will flash continuously (rapid flashing) and the vehicle cannot be started. WWW. wiring. It must be carried out by trained Renault network personnel. (Renault Card inserted fully in the reader) indicator light 1 lights up for a few seconds and then goes out.WS 1 1 The vehicle is automatically protected a few seconds after the Renault Card is removed from the card reader. WWW. If the vehicle does not recognise the code.MANUALS. Any work or modification to the engine immobiliser (computer. etc. Operating principle When the ignition is switched on.) may be dangerous. Indicator lights Vehicle protection indicator light A few seconds after the ignition has been switched off. The vehicle will not be protected until the Renault Card has been taken out of the card reader. you can start the engine. The vehicle has recognised the code and the engine can be started. Indicator light to indicate the engine immobiliser is operating When the ignition is switched on (Renault Card inserted fully). Indicator light 1 lights up for a few seconds and then goes out.15 .MANUALS.ENGINE IMMOBILISER This prevents the vehicle being driven by anyone not in possession of the vehicle's Renault Card. use the second Renault Card (delivered with the vehicle) if possible. 1 Indicator light to indicate that the system is not operating correctly After the ignition has been switched on (Renault Card inserted fully). WWW.WS 1.MANUALS. this indicates that the system is not operating correctly.MANUALS.16 . if indicator light 1 continues to flash or remains lit. it is essential to consult a Renault Dealer as only he is qualified to repair the engine immobiliser. In all cases.WS If the Renault Card is faulty (rapid flashing of indicator light 1 and the card reader).ENGINE IMMOBILISER (continued) WWW. with the notches facing the front. To do this. move the front section A of the head restraint forwards or backwards until it feels comfortable.WS 1. pull the head restraint towards you and slide it up or down at the same time. Never lower the head restraint so far that it touches the seatback: position 2 (which acts as a stop) is the lowest permitted height. To adjust the angle of the head restraint After setting the height on certain vehicles the angle of the head restraint can be adjusted. press on the tab 1 to release it and pull. Lower the head restraint until it locks in position. To put back the head restraint Insert the rods into the sleeves. The distance between your head and the head restraint should be as small as possible. The top of the head should be in line with the top of the head restraint.WS A 2 2 1 1 To adjust the height While sitting on the seat. WWW.MANUALS. To remove the head restraint With the head restraint in the up position.17 . Ensure that it is in place and in the correct position. The head restraint is important for safety.MANUALS.FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS WWW. 18 . WWW. The fully lowered position of the head rest is a storage position: it should not be used when the seat is occupied. To refit the head rest Insert the rods into the sleeves.WS To adjust the height Pull the head rest towards you and slide it at the same time.WS 1. Ensure that it is in place and in the correct position.MANUALS.MANUALS. and lower the head rest to the desired height. The head restraint is important for safety. To remove it Press tab 1. Storage position for the rear head rests Press tab 1 and lower the head rest completely. The top of the head should be in line with the top of the head restraint. with the notches to the front. The distance between your head and the head restraint should be as small as possible.REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS 1 WWW. MANUALS. To adjust the height of the driver’s seat: Move lever 3 as often as necessary: . To adjust the lumbar support of the driver’s seat Move handle 4.19 For safety reasons.WS 1.WS 1 3 4 3 1 2 2 To move forwards or backwards Lift lever 1 to unlock the seat. thus obstructing its use. WWW. .upwards to raise the seat. Release the lever in the required position and ensure that the seat is locked in place. only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary.downwards to lower the seat. Make sure the seatback is locked in place correctly. To tilt the seatback Raise lever 2 and tilt the seatback until it is in the required position. Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres. We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks excessively to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced. .FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL WWW.MANUALS. WS 1 With the ignition on.20 Even if the indicator light is lit up. The system has a thermostat and only operates when the passenger compartment temperature is less than 12°C (with a tolerance of plus or minus 4°C).HEATED SEATS WWW. the system is not necessarily activated. WWW.WS 1. . A light lights up on the instrument panel. press switch 1.MANUALS.MANUALS. WWW. For safety reasons. • To raise Move the rear part of the switch up.FRONT SEATS WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS Switches 1 and 3 recall the stored seat positions: switch 1 is used to adjust the seat cushion and switch 3 is used to adjust the seatback. • To move backwards Move the switch backwards. 1 Adjusting the seat: switch 1 • To move forwards Move the switch forwards. The system operates: .WS 1.for vehicles fitted with button 2. for up to 40 minutes after the ignition is switched off. Make sure the seatback is locked in place correctly. Nothing should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres.MANUALS. For vehicles fitted with button 2. We would advise you not to recline the seatbacks excessively to ensure that the effectiveness of the seat belts is not reduced. this system also operates whenever the driver's door is opened. . WWW.WS 2 3 Adjusting the seatback: switch 3 • To incline the seatback Move the switch to the front or rear. In this case it is possible to store a driving position using the RENAULT Card. thus obstructing its use. • To lower Move the rear part of the switch down.MANUALS.with the Renault Card at accessories position (first notch).21 . this is used to store the chosen driving position. only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary. MANUALS.WS 1.when opening the driver’s door. When a driving position is stored. press briefly on button 2.22 . adjust the seat using switches 1 and 3 (see paragraph “front seats with electric control” in section 1).MANUALS. The system operates: . it is possible to adjust the driving position but not to proceed to driving position recall. . for approximately 40 minutes. Note: stored position recall is interrupted if one of the seat adjustment buttons is pressed during recall. A driving position groups together the driver’s seat adjustments and the external rear view mirror adjustments.with the Renault Card at “accessories” position (first notch). Press button 2 until you hear the beep: the driving position is stored. WWW. the seat and external rear view mirror adjustments linked to the Renault Card used are automatically recalled when the doors are unlocked and opened using the Renault Card. Repeat this procedure for every Renault Card.WS 2 3 Recalling a stored position With the vehicle stopped. When driving.DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION MEMORY It is possible to store a driving position using the Renault Card. 1 Driver’s seat memory procedure With the Renault Card fully inserted in the card reader. WWW. ignition switched off. MANUALS. ensure that the pressure of the lap belt on the abdomen is not excessive.e. avoid wearing heavy clothing or having bulky objects under the belts. Even pregnant women should wear a seat belt.WS Adjusting your driving position • Sit with your back firmly against the seatback. • Adjust the position of the steering wheel. . The belt should be worn so that it is as close to the body as possible.Then adjust your seat belt to provide maximum protection. • Adjust the position of your head restraint. In this case. WWW. The lap strap 2 should be held firmly over the thighs and against the pelvis. WWW. This is essential to ensure that your lumbar vertebrae are in the correct position. This adjustment allows you to select the seat position which offers you the best possible vision. The shoulder strap 1 should be as close to the base of the neck as possible but not on it. Before driving off: . • Adjust the height of the seat.WS 1.MANUALS. 1 2 Adjusting the seat belts Sit with your back firmly against the seatback. You must also comply with the local legislation in the particular country you are in. i. • Adjust the distance between the seat and the pedals. The seatback should be adjusted so that your arms are slightly bent when you hold the steering wheel. Incorrectly adjusted seat belts may cause injuries in the event of an accident. Your seat should be as far back as possible for you to be able to press in the clutch pedal fully.SEAT BELTS Always wear your seat belt when travelling in your car. For maximum safety your head should be as near as possible to the head restraint.23 .First ensure that your driving position is correct. Then allow the belt to rewind automatically. WWW. If the belt jams before clicking. when the car reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph or 10 km/h. .24 .SEAT BELTS (continued) WWW. it flashes and a beep sounds for 90 seconds before the light reverts to its steady lit status. and. . push button 3 and lower the seat belt simultaneously. To release Press button 5 on the housing 6 and the seat belt will be retracted by the inertia reel. To fasten Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly and ensure the buckle 4 locks into the housing 6 (check it is locked by pulling on the buckle 4). .MANUALS.MANUALS.If the problem persists. Guide the buckle to help the operation. allow it to return before attempting to unwind it again.Pull the belt slowly but firmly so that just over an inch (3 cm) unwinds.to raise the seat belt.Unwind it again.WS 1 Locking (continued) If your belt becomes completely jammed: .WS 1. 3 4 6 5 6 Adjusting the height of the seat belt Press button 3 to select the seat belt adjustment height so that shoulder strap 1 is worn as shown above: . push button 3 upwards.to lower the seat belt. Make sure that the seat belt is locked in position correctly after you have adjusted it. . Driver's seat belt not fastened warning light This lights up. consult your Renault Dealer. WS 1. Rear centre belt Unwind the position 1.WS 1 The belts are locked. 4 2 3 5 belt slowly from Fasten the last sliding buckle 4 into the red housing 5.REAR SEAT BELTS Rear outer seat belts WWW. unlocked and adjusted in the same way as the front belts. WWW.MANUALS.25 . Fasten the black buckle 2 into the black housing 3.MANUALS. ): a seat belt which is worn too loosely risks causing injuries in case of an accident. fitting child seats) consult your Renault Dealer. • Do not use devices which give any play in the belts (e. • When refitting the rear bench seat.WS • No modification may be made to the component parts of the restraint system (belts and seats and their mountings) fitted originally.26 . take care that the seat belts are correctly positioned so that they can be used properly. etc. • Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your knees with your seat belt around them. have your seat belts replaced as soon as they show any signs of wear. For special applications (e. WWW.MANUALS.g. • If necessary. Likewise.WS 1. • Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back. clips. clothes pegs. • The belt should never be twisted.MANUALS. • Following a serious accident the seat belts in use at the time must be replaced. readjust the position and tension of the belt. WWW.SEAT BELTS The following information applies to both the vehicle's front and rear seat belts.g. . load limiters. driver's seat lapbelt pretensioner. if there is a severe frontal impact and depending on the force of the impact. driver's and passenger front airbags. • Testing of the electric trigger system may only be carried out by a specially trained technician using special equipment. airbags.the buckle pretensioner (which triggers to take up the seat belt play). contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbag gas generators. • To avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury. even if identical. • No operations whatsoever are permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners.MANUALS. The pretensioners hold the seat belt against the body and thus increase its efficiency. only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the pretensioner and airbags system.piston 1 which immediately retracts the seat belt. These systems are provided to act independently or together when the vehicle suffers a frontal impact.the large volume front airbag. the low volume front airbag and the load limiter.seat belt locking. .MANUALS. 2 1 Pretensioners With the ignition switched on. wiring) or use on any other vehicle. the system may engage: . computers. Depending on the force of the impact the system may engage: . WWW.the lap pretensioner (for the driver’s seat).METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS These are: buckle pretensioners. have the entire restraint system checked.27 . WWW.piston 2 on the driver’s seat. . • When the vehicle is scrapped.WS 1.WS • Following an accident. . a single warning light on the instrument panel.An airbag and gas generator fitted on the steering wheel for the driver and in the dashboard for the front passenger. when the airbag inflates. superficial grazing to the skin. In a situation where an airbag is required. pretensioners. it must inflate immediately and this may cause some minor. this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level. This explains why. WWW. An “Airbag” marking on the steering wheel and dashboard and a label in the lower section of the windscreen inform you of the presence of additional means of restraint (airbags.A computer for both systems. Each airbag system consists of: .28 The airbag system uses the principles of pyrotechnics. produce smoke (this does not mean that a fire is about to start) and make a noise upon detonation. etc) in the passenger compartment.MANUALS. which includes the impact sensor and a monitor controlling the electrical trigger system for the gas generator.WS Driver and passenger airbags An airbag may be provided for both the driver and the front passenger.METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) Load limiter WWW. . it will generate heat.WS 1. . Warning relating to the service life of airbags and pretensioners Pyrotechnic systems for airbags and pretensioners have a limited service life: refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle for the replacement frequency. Above a certain severity of impact. .MANUALS. MANUALS. The air bag then deflates immediately so that the passengers are not impeded in any way when they get out of the vehicle. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. this is the first degree of operation.“large volume” air bag.WS 1 Operation This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on. Special feature of the front air bag There are two volumes of operation depending on the force of the impact: . the air bag seams rip so that a larger volume of air is released into the bag (for the most forceful impacts). Your protection will be reduced until this problem is rectified. there is a fault in the system. the air bag(s) inflate(s) rapidly.METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) WWW. .29 . cushioning the impact of the driver's head and chest against the steering wheel and the front passenger's head against the dashboard.“low volume” air bag.MANUALS. WWW. or lights up when the engine is running.WS 1. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Faults Warning light 1 lights up on the instrument panel when the ignition is turned on and then goes out after a few seconds. If a severe frontal impact occurs. (Refer to the information on Deactivation of passenger airbags in Section 1). As a general rule. • Do not cover the steering wheel cushion.MANUALS.MANUALS.). Warnings concerning the passenger airbag: • Do not attach or affix any objects (badge. etc. etc. etc. clock.) to the steering wheel cushion. hands. parcels. telephone holder.) well away from the dashboard. • The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO FIT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT WHILE THE RESTRAINING METHODS ADDITIONAL TO THE PASSENGER SEAT BELT ARE NOT DEACTIVATED. • Do not attach any objects (badge. head. telephone holder. If you sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on Adjusting your driving position in Section 1). walking stick.) to the dashboard with adhesive near where the airbag is located A. • Nothing should be placed between the dashboard and the passenger (pet.WS A Warnings concerning the driver’s airbag • Do not adjust either the steering wheel or the steering wheel cushion. umbrella. clock.METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (continued) WWW. keep all parts of the body (knees. WWW. • You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of the front passenger in the event of an impact. you will ensure that there is sufficient space for the airbag to inflate properly and to be fully effective.WS 1. logo. logo. etc. • The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from the RENAULT network). All the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the airbag inflates.30 . • Do not sit too close to the steering wheel. even if identical. wiring) or use on any other vehicle.METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR OUTER SEAT BELTS These are: Seat belt pretensioners integrated with inertia reels. this mechanism is used to limit the force of the belt against the body so that it is at an acceptable level. have the entire restraint system checked.MANUALS.MANUALS. If the vehicle is subject to a severe frontal impact. depending on the force of the impact: . These systems are provided to act independently or together when the vehicle is subjected to a frontal impact.WS 1. Load limiter.the pretensioner is triggered to rectify seat belt play. There are two possibilities.WS • Following an accident. • When the vehicle is scrapped. Rear seat belt pretensioners This system is only operational when the ignition is switched on. only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the pretensioner and airbags system. contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the pretensioner and airbag gas generators. airbags.31 . computers. a piston immediately retracts the seat belt buckle pulling the seat belt tight against the body. Load limiter Above a certain severity of impact. thereby improving its efficiency.protection is provided by the belt only. . • No operations whatsoever are permitted on any part of the system (pretensioners. • Testing of the electric trigger system may only be carried out by a specially trained technician using special equipment. WWW. • To avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury. WWW. Warning relating to the service life of airbags and pretensioners Pyrotechnic systems for airbags and pretensioners have a limited service life: refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle for the replacement frequency. The airbag operates through the slits in the seatbacks (door side): never put any objects in the slits.SIDE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WWW.WS A marking on the windowscreen informs you of the presence of additional means of restraint (airbags. 1. pretensioners. The use of any covers other than those designed for your vehicle (and including those designed for another vehicle) may affect the operation of these airbags and reduce your protection. which are triggered on the side of the seat (door side) to protect the passengers from severe side impacts. • Do not place any accessories. This may prevent the airbag from operating correctly or cause injury if the air bag is deployed. etc) in the passenger compartment. Consult your RENAULT Dealer to find out if these covers may be purchased from RENAULT outlets. Lateral airbags A These are airbags fitted to each front seat.MANUALS. Curtain airbags B These are airbags fitted along the top of the side of the vehicle and which are triggered along the front and rear side windows to protect the passengers in the event of a severe side impact. WWW.MANUALS. and the rear seats in some vehicles.32 . • No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the internal fittings. except by qualified RENAULT Network personnel.WS B A B A Warnings concerning the side air bag • Fitting seat covers: Seats equipped with an airbag require special covers specifically designed for your vehicle. objects or even animals between the seat back. the door and the internal fittings. WWW. If seat belts are not worn. It is therefore essential to wear the seat belt at all times. wiring. only qualified RENAULT Network personnel may work on the airbag system. etc.WS The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed. contact your RENAULT Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s). although such minor injuries are always possible with airbags.WS 1.33 . • To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid incorrect triggering of the system which may cause injury. have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident.) (except by qualified RENAULT network personnel).ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT All the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the airbag inflates. side or rear impacts or if the vehicle turns over. The airbag does not offer protection against minor and moderately serious frontal impacts. WWW. • No work or modification whatsoever may be performed on the entire airbag system (computer. inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle.MANUALS. Both the airbags and seat belts are integral parts of the same protection system.MANUALS. • As a safety precaution. it exposes the occupants to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. is stolen or broken into. • When scrapping your vehicle. • When selling or lending the vehicle. It is therefore advisable to select a child restraint that complies with European regulation ECE 44.CHILD SAFETY In all countries there are regulations governing the use of restraint systems for children and babies. Before installing a child seat in the front seat (if fitting is permitted) If the passenger seat is fitted with one.pull the head rest up to its maximum position.34 WWW.WS . carry out the following adjustments: . WWW. Never use the belt for more than one person at the same time. . They may be different to the guidelines in this handbook.MANUALS. Under no circumstances should babies or children be allowed to travel sitting on the knees of another passenger in the vehicle. transporting a child without a restraint is the equivalent of allowing him or her to play on a third-floor balcony which does not have any railings. even if you yourself are wearing a belt. . . (1) Always comply with the laws of the country in which you are travelling.straighten the seatback as much as possible.raise the seat squab as far as possible. . 1.pull back the seat as far as possible.WS Remember that a collision at 30 mph (50 km/h) is the same as falling a distance of 10 metres. If a head-on collision occurs at 30 mph (50 km/h) a child weighing 30 kg (66 lbs) will be transformed into a missile equivalent to one tonne: you will find it impossible to hold the child. Expressed in other terms. In Europe children under 12 years of age or smaller than 1. It is particularly dangerous to put the belt round your child when he or she is sitting on your knee. Refer to the Child safety equipment booklet available from the RENAULT Network to choose the seat suited to your child and recommended for your vehicle. Child restraints for which approval was obtained after January 1992 offer a level of safety much greater than for restraints with approval before that date.50 m(1) must be seated in an approved safety device which is suitable for the weight and size of the child.Set the seat belt height control to the low position. The tables on the following pages inform you of the types of seat that can be fitted in each of the vehicle seat positions on the vehicle in accordance with the European directive. The driver is responsible for ensuring that this equipment is used correctly. Restraints that comply with this legislation must be marked with an orange label bearing the letter E followed by a number (which stands for the country where it is type approved) and the year in which the type approval was granted.MANUALS. (1) A child taller than 1.35 .50 m or weighing more than 36 kg can be strapped directly in the seat in the same way as an adult. adjust the height of the head rest or remove it if necessary. (3) DANGER RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: NEVER FIT A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT TO THIS SEAT.I (2) X X U (2) X X: seat not suitable for fitting a child seat of this age range.MANUALS.CHILD SAFETY (continued) Age of child (weight of child) WWW.MANUALS. WWW.WS 1. only RENAULT seats are approved. U: seat suitable for fitting a belt-fitted child seat classed as universal for this age range. I : seat equipped with anchoring points for mounting a seat for this age range using Isofix locks.WS Front passenger seat (3) X Rear side seats U-I Vehicle without front passenger airbag inhibition Rear centre seat X Birth to approximately 9 months (weight below 13 kg) From 9 months to approximately 3 years (weight from 9 to 18 kg) From 3 years to approximately 12 years (1) (weight from 15 to 36 kg) X U . check that it can be fitted. (2) Place the back of the child seat against the seatback of the vehicle. (4) DANGER RISK OF DEATH OR SEVERE INJURY: BEFORE FITTING A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT TO THIS SEAT.CHILD SAFETY (continued) Age of child (weight of child) WWW.WS Front passenger seat (3) (4) U Rear side seats U-I Vehicle without front passenger airbag inhibition Rear centre seat X Birth to approximately 9 months (weight below 13 kg) From 9 months to approximately 3 years (weight from 9 to 18 kg) From 3 years to approximately 12 years (1) (weight from 15 to 36 kg) U U . adjust the height of the head rest or remove it if necessary.I (2) X X U (2) X X: seat not suitable for fitting a child seat of this age range. WWW.50 m or weighing more than 36 kg can be strapped directly into the seat in the same way as an adult. CHECK THAT THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. (3) Only a rear-facing child seat may be installed in this seat.MANUALS.36 .MANUALS. only RENAULT seats are approved. (Refer to the information on Deactivation of front passenger airbags in Section 1).WS 1. (2) Place the back of the child seat against the seatback of the vehicle. (1) A child taller than 1. I : seat equipped with anchoring points for mounting a seat for this age range using Isofix locks. U: seat suitable for fitting a belt-fitted child seat classed as universal for this age range. check that it can be fitted. CHILD SAFETY (continued) The right choice WWW.MANUALS.WS The safety of your children is also your responsibility. To ensure that your child has the maximum possible protection, we recommend that you use seats obtained from a Renault Dealer. If your vehicle is fitted with an Isofix system you should use an Isofix seat (see section 1, paragraph “Isofix child seat attachment system”). Restraint systems for all the categories are available. These systems have been developed in consultation with the manufacturers and have been tested in Renault vehicles. Consult your Renault Dealer and ask him to help you install it. 1 2 Category 0 and 0+ A child's neck is very susceptible to injury up to the age of two. In a front-facing seat there is a risk that the child will sustain neck injuries in the event of a frontal collision. Renault therefore recommends a rear-facing seat with a harness that gives all-round protection (figure 1). Category 1 Between the ages of 2 and 4, a child's pelvis is not fully developed. Restraints using the vehicle's three-point belts are not adequate and there is a risk that the child will sustain abdominal injuries in the event of a frontal collision. It is therefore advisable to use rear-facing seats (figure 1), bucket-type seats (figure 2) or seats with harnesses. Place the head restraint at the top position to allow you to press the seat back of the child seat firmly against the vehicle seat back. To avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use RENAULT approved accessories because they are suitable for your car and are the only accessories for which RENAULT will provide a warranty. WWW.MANUALS.WS 1.37 CHILD SAFETY (continued) WWW.MANUALS.WS A booster seat with a height-adjustable seatback and a belt guide are recommended as this will allow the belt to be worn as close to the base of the neck as possible but not on it. Place the head rest in the top position to allow you to press the seat back of the child seat firmly against the vehicle seat back. If a booster seat without a seatback is used, the vehicle's head rest will have to be adjusted to suit the child's stature; the upper edge of the head rest must be at the same height as the top of the child's head and should never be lower than in line with the child's eyes. 3 Category 2 (15 to 25 kg) and category 3 (22 to 36 kg) To correctly restrain the pelvis of a child up to 12 years or a height of 1.50 m, it is preferable to use seats that can be combined with the three point seat belts (figure 3) with belt guides so that the vehicle's three-point belt lies flat across the child's legs. WWW.MANUALS.WS 1.38 The standard classifies child restraints in five categories: Category 0 : from 0 to 10 kg (0 to 22 lbs) Category 0+: from 0 to 13 kg (0 to 28 lbs) Category 1 : from 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lbs) Category 2 : from 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lbs) Category 3 : from 22 to 36 kg (48 to 80 lbs) CHILD SAFETY (continued) 5 WWW.MANUALS.WS 6 DANGER As front passenger airbag triggering and the position of a rear facing child seat are incompatible, it is not permitted to install such a seat in this position unless the vehicle is fitted with an airbag deactivation device. Refer to the information on deactivating the front passenger airbag. The child may suffer very serious injuries if the airbag inflates. Label A (on the dashboard) and markings B (on the sun visor) remind you of these instructions. WWW.MANUALS.WS 1.39 CHILD SAFETY (continued) WWW.MANUALS.WS 2 1 Deactivation of passenger airbag the front With the ignition on, it is essential to check that AIRBAG OFF indicator light 2 on the dashboard is lit up. This warning light remains lit to confirm that you can fit a child seat, as the left-hand airbag has been deactivated. Local legislation regarding the transport of children must be respected. (if fitted) You must deactivate the front left-hand airbag before fitting a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat. To deactivate the airbag turn off the ignition, push and turn lock 1 to the OFF position. The airbag is deactivated. WWW.MANUALS.WS 1.40 pressing lock 1 deactivates the front passenger airbag and the indicator lights up to warn you. and then check that AIRBAG OFF indicator light 2. The airbag is activated.41 .WS 1. Six seconds after switching on the ignition. push and turn lock 1 to the ON position. To reactivate the airbag turn off the ignition.MANUALS.WS front Operating faults It is FORBIDDEN to fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the airbag activation/deactivation system is faulty. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. WWW. We do not recommend fitting any other kind of passenger seat device. Activation or deactivation of the passenger airbag must be done with the ignition off. goes out. Switch the ignition back on.CHILD SAFETY (continued) Activation of passenger airbag the WWW.MANUALS. You should reactivate the airbag as soon as you remove the child seat from the front passenger seat to ensure the protection of your front passenger in the event of an impact. MANUALS. To purchase these seats.WS This is a new procedure for installing a child seat.).MANUALS. etc. These seats can also be installed conventionally in other vehicles using a three-point seat belt.mounting system for child seats WWW. please contact your RENAULT Dealer.CHILD SAFETY Isofix . WWW. It consists of the following components: • Two anchoring rings per seat located between the seat the seatback. Only special RENAULT seats are approved for this vehicle. • A special RENAULT child seat fitted with two catches which hook onto the two rings. toys. rags.42 . • Make sure that there is nothing obstructing the seat mounting mechanism at the anchorage points (gravel.WS 1. • Always remember to fasten the seat belts on child seats for all journeys. It can be used on the rear side seat positions of the vehicle. the front seat must not be moved back beyond the halfway point on the seat runners and the seatback must be in and upright position. • Position the fitting guides 1 (delivered with the seat) over the openings provided in the seat squab.WS 1.CHILD SAFETY (continued) WWW. Fitting a child seat • Before fitting and using the seat. read the instructions provided carefully. WWW. • Hold the seat in position so that the catches 3 on the seat are opposite the two rings 2 fitted to the rear side seats concerned.MANUALS.43 . Rear-facing Isofix seat When a rear-facing child seat is installed.WS 1 2 3 Installation principle Front-facing Isofix seat When a front-facing child seat is installed.MANUALS. the front seat must not be moved forward beyond the halfway point on the seat runners. The seat back must be close to or touching the shell of the child seat. .MANUALS. • Push on the base of the seat firmly to bring it into contact with the seatback and make sure it is securely in position. .Pass the belt 4 between the two rear head restraint rods. use belt 4 delivered with the seat: .CHILD SAFETY (continued) WWW.WS 4 4 5 6 5 7 3 Fitting a child seat (continued) • Latch the hooks 3 onto the rings and make sure that the seat is locked properly by moving it forwards and backwards and from right to left. Mounting the seat Each of the rear side seats is fitted with two rings for mounting the base of the child seat.Attach the belt catch 5 to the ring 7.WS 1. For the mounting ring on a frontfacing seat.44 . WWW.Slide the cover to access the ring 7. Consult your Renault Dealer for how to access the rings the first time you install the seat.Attach the catch 5 to the ring 6 located inside the luggage compartment.MANUALS. For the mounting ring on a rearfacing seat. use belt 4 delivered with the seat: . • Set your children a good example . • Always avoid dressing the child in bulky garments and do not place any objects between the child and the restraint system. • Never allow your child to stand up or kneel on the seats while the vehicle is moving. • The seat belt in the vehicle must be taut so that the child's seat is held in position securely. • Use the seat belts to hold the seat in position.MANUALS.MANUALS. particularly when he or she is asleep. • Following a serious accident have the seat belts and restraint systems in use at the time checked. Check the tension regularly. even if he/she is in a restraint device. WWW.WS 1.CHILD SAFETY (continued) WWW.always wear your seat belt. it may become dislodged and pose a risk to other vehicle occupants. • Make sure the child does not get out of the vehicle at the side where there is traffic. even if it is not occupied. if an accident were to occur. • Never wear the belt under the arm or behind the back. • Follow carefully the instructions for fitting provided by the manufacturer of the restraint system. Otherwise. • Check that the child is in the correct position for the entire journey.WS CHILD SAFETY • No modifications may be made to the component parts of the restraint system (belts and seats and their mountings) fitted originally. • Activate the rear door locks (if your vehicle is equipped with these). • Never leave a child unsupervised in a vehicle.45 . • The harness or belt should be taut and fitted to suit the child's stature. 46 .MANUALS. LEFT-HAND DRIVE WWW.DRIVER’S LAYOUT.WS 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 27 26 25 24 23 19 18 17 WWW.MANUALS.WS 22 21 20 1. 47 14 Passenger airbag location.DRIVER’S LAYOUT.WS 10 Warning lights for: • Driver's seat belt not fastened • Door(s) open • Puncture 11 Centre air vents. LEFT-HAND DRIVE (continued) The equipment fitted. 6 Radio satellite controls.WS 18 Air conditioning controls 9 Tyre pressure monitor display . • Computer information scrolling control 8 Engine start/stop button. 19 Ashtray and cigarette lighter 20 Handbrake 21 Switches for: • Hazard warning lights • Central door locking 22 Gear lever 23 RENAULT Card reader 12 Clock. WWW. location. etc.MANUALS. radio information. car phone. 15 Demister window 16 Lateral vent 17 Glove box outlet for side WWW. 7 • Stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/wipe. navigation 13 Radio. 5 Location for driver's airbag Horn. depends on the version. navigation system display.MANUALS. etc. option and country. 1 Lateral vent 2 Demister outlet for left-hand side window 3 Stalk for: • direction indicators • exterior lights • front fog lights • rear fog lights 4 Instruments. Cup holder system 24 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and depth 25 Storage compartment 26 Control for bonnet release 27 Controls for: • Electric headlight beam adjustment • Dimmer for control lighting • Cruise control and speed limiter • Electronic Stability Programme (ESP) • Voice synthesiser 1. described below. temperature. depending on vehicle. MANUALS.DRIVER’S LAYOUT.WS 24 23 22 1.WS 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 27 26 25 21 20 19 18 17 16 WWW. RIGHT-HAND DRIVE WWW.48 .MANUALS. temperature. 7 Clock. • Computer information scrolling control 14 Demister window 15 Lateral vent 16 Controls for: • electric headlight beam adjustment • Dimmer for control lighting • Cruise control and speed limiter. outlet for side 1 Demister outlet for left-hand side window 2 Passenger airbag location 3 Radio. navigation location.WS 26 Glove box 27 Side vent 1. depends on the version. depending on vehicle. Cup holder system 18 Glove box 19 Control for adjusting steering wheel height and depth 20 Air conditioning controls 4 Tyre pressure monitor display 5 Warning lights for: • Driver's seat belt not fastened reminder. described below.WS 10 Control instruments 11 Location for driver's airbag Horn. 8 Engine start/stop button. 12 Radio satellite controls. 13 • Stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/wipe. • Door(s) open. RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (continued) The equipment fitted. WWW. car phone.MANUALS. 9 Stalk for: • direction indicators • exterior lights • front fog lights • rear fog lights 21 RENAULT Card reader 22 Handbrake 23 Controls for: • Hazard warning lights • Central door locking 24 Gear lever 25 Ashtray and cigarette lighter WWW. option and country.DRIVER’S LAYOUT. • Puncture 6 Centre air vents.MANUALS. • Electronic Stability Program (ESP) • Voice synthesiser. navigation system display. etc. 17 Bonnet release. etc. radio information.49 . 2 3 4a 4 5 WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 If the If the 1.WS .50 warning light lights up. WWW.MANUALS. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.INSTRUMENT PANEL The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. warning light lights up. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and traction control indicator light There are several reasons for this warning light to come on: refer to the information on the electronic stability program (ESP) and traction control in Section 2. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. This is not serious unless warning light lights up.MANUALS. the needle should be below zone 4a.WS 1.51 . Under severe conditions the needle may enter this zone. or lights up when the engine is running. engine speed prohibited. WWW.WS 1 Front fog indicator light light Heated seat indicator light 6 1 Low headlight washer fluid level indicator light Top up as soon as possible. there is a fault in the system. 3 Fuel level gauge Rear fog light indicator light 4 Coolant temperature indicator light In normal use.MANUALS.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. Airbag warning light This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out after a few seconds. 5 Speedometer (km or miles per hour) Not used 2 Rev counter (scale ×100) Red shaded zone. WWW.WS . you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.WS 3 4a 4 5 2 1 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 If the If the 1.52 warning light lights up. warning light lights up.MANUALS.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country.MANUALS. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. refer to the Child safety information in Section 1. WWW. press the trip distance recorder reset button or the information scroll button on the trip computer. the dashes and the word “oil” flash. Refer to the paragraphs on monitoring the tyre pressures in Section 2. see the information on the Cruise control and Speed limiter in Section 2. press the button again). Front passenger airbag deactivated warning light For operating information. the display will show “oil ok” (To gain a more precise indication of the level.When the level is at a minimum.MANUALS. The squares which appear on the display indicate the level. depending on the severity of the fault. To move to on-board computer reading. Top up the level as soon as possible.WS 6 Speed limiter and cruise control indicator light To understand how this operates. The number of dots displayed is reduced as the oil level drops and they are replaced by a dash. the display will toggle depending on the trip computer: see the “trip computer” paragraph in section 1.if the level is correct. When ignition has been switched on for approximately 30 seconds: . . and “OK” is no longer displayed and the SERV warning will light up. Headlight main beam indicator light Headlight dipped beam indicator light WWW.53 7 Oil level display function The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should have been switched off for some time to obtain an accurate level reading. Trip computer display After 30 seconds.MANUALS.WS 1.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 6 Tyre pressure warning light This indicator light comes on for different reasons. . WS 3 4a 4 5 2 1 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 If the If the 1.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. WWW. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future.54 warning light lights up.MANUALS. warning light lights up.MANUALS.WS . WWW. It may light up alone or together with other warning lights. SERVICE warning light This comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out after 3 seconds. If it lights up when the vehicle is being driven. fill up with fuel as soon as possible.MANUALS.55 .MANUALS.WS 9 Engine immobiliser system indicator light Refer to the information on the Engine immobiliser in Section 1.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 9 7 Reset button Press the button to reset the trip distance recorder and the on-board computer memory.WS 1. It indicates that it is essential to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). WWW. Turning right indicator light WWW. Turning left indicator light 8 STOP warning light This light goes out as soon as the engine starts. it is advisable to stop at a RENAULT Dealer soon. Low fuel level warning light This goes out approximately three seconds after the engine starts. It may light up alone or together with other warning lights. If it lights up or remains lit up. WWW.56 warning light lights up. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.MANUALS. warning light lights up.WS 3 4a 4 5 2 1 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 If the If the 1.WS . WWW.MANUALS. •Electronic fault warning light (on petrol and diesel versions) If this light lights up when you are driving. it indicates that the circuit is overcharging or discharged. •Coolant temperature warning light If this light lights up when you are driving. call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer. If it lights up when you are driving. 9 9 Warning light for serious injection fault/ Coolant temperature warning light •Warning light for serious injection fault If this light flashes when you are driving.MANUALS. switch off the ignition and call a Renault Dealer. If it lights up while you are driving. it indicates that the heater plugs are switched on. WWW. Stop and allow the engine to run at idle speed for a minute or two. Oil pressure warning light This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out within 3 seconds.MANUALS.WS 9 Heater plugs “on” (diesel version) and electronic fault indicator light (petrol and diesel versions). If this is normal. Battery charge warning light It should go out as soon as the engine starts. •Heater plugs “on” (on diesel version) With the ignition switched on. The temperature should drop. it indicates an electrical or electronic fault. If it does not. Call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer if necessary.WS 1. stop at once and switch off the ignition and check the oil level. It goes out after pre-heating is sufficient and the engine can be started. stop the engine and check the coolant level (having let the engine cool down). Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible.57 . Stop and have the circuit checked. it indicates engine overheating. this light should light up. WWW. it indicates a fault in the injection system Stop immediately.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. WWW. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. WWW.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.WS .MANUALS.MANUALS. warning light lights up.WS 3 4a 4 5 2 1 6 12 11 10 9 8 7 If the If the 1.58 warning light lights up. it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is low or that there is a fault in the braking system.MANUALS.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. If it lights up when you are driving. Braking will then occur normally.WS 1. WWW. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. WWW. fuel economy and driving in section 2. the light lights up when the ignition is switched on then goes out. Stop and call a RENAULT Dealer. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible.WS 11 Toxic fume filter system warning light For vehicles equipped with this option. reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing.59 . it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system. Handbrake on and brake circuit fault warning light If this lights up when braking. 10 Warning lights for the operation of and/or faults on the automatic gearbox. • If it lights up continuously.MANUALS. Anti-lock braking warning light This lights up when ignition is switched on. without the anti-lock system. Refer to the information on automatic gearboxes in Section 2. consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. then goes out. 12 9 Not used. Refer to the information on anti-pollution. • If it flashes. WWW.MANUALS. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow. The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1).INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country.WS 1 7 14 13 If the If the 12 11 10 9 8 warning light lights up. 2 3 4 5a 5 6 WWW.MANUALS.WS 1. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future. warning light lights up.60 . the needle should be below the area 5a. This is not serious unless warning light lights up. 5 Coolant temperature indicator In normal use. Under severe conditions the needle may enter this area.MANUALS.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 4 1 Not used Engine immobiliser system indicator light Refer to the information on the Engine immobiliser in Section 1. If it does not light up when the ignition is switched on. or lights up when the engine is running. 3 Fuel level gauge Rear fog light indicator light Front fog light indicator light WWW. there is a fault in the system.WS 1.WS 1 Handbrake on and brake circuit incident warning light If this lights up when braking.61 . Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible.MANUALS. WWW. engine speed prohibited. it indicates that the fluid level in the circuit is low or that there is a fault in the braking system. Not used Airbag warning light This comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes off after a few seconds. Stop and call a RENAULT Dealer. 2 Rev counter (scale ×100) Red shaded zone. WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 7 14 13 If the If the 12 11 10 9 8 warning light lights up. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country.WS 1. 2 3 4 5a 5 6 WWW. The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1).62 . you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.MANUALS. warning light lights up. Headlight main beam indicator light Dipped beam headlight indicator light Speed limiter and cruise control indicator light To understand how this operates. consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible.WS 8 Turning right indicator light 9 Toxic fume filter system warning light For vehicles equipped with this option. 6 Speedometer (km or miles per hour) 7 Heated seat warning light Front passenger airbag deactivated warning light For operating information. • If it flashes. 11 Information display This display groups together several types of information.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. Depending on how significant the fault concerned is. • If it lights up continuously. the light lights up when the ignition is switched on then goes out. WWW. fuel economy and driving in section 2. Refer to the information on anti-pollution. refer to the Child safety information in section 1. see the Cruise control and Speed limiter paragraphs in Section 2.63 .MANUALS. it may display one or more warning lights simultaneously: see the information on the information display in Section 1. Consult your RENAULT Dealer as soon as possible. WWW.WS 1. 10 Reset button Press the button to reset the trip distance recorder and the trip computer memory.MANUALS. reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. MANUALS. you must stop as soon as traffic conditions allow.WS 1 7 14 13 If the If the 12 11 10 9 8 warning light lights up.WS 1.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. 2 3 4 5a 5 6 WWW.64 . The illumination of certain warning lights is accompanied by a spoken message on vehicles fitted with the voice synthesiser (see “voice synthesiser” in section 1). warning light lights up. you should visit a Renault Dealer in the near future.MANUALS. WWW. Braking will then occur normally. the display will show “oil OK” (To gain a more precise indication of the level.65 . then goes out.if the level is correct.INSTRUMENT PANEL (continued) The presence and operation of the warning and indicator lights described below depend on the vehicle equipment and country. Anti-lock braking warning light This lights up when ignition is switched on. WWW.WS 1.MANUALS. and “OK” is no longer displayed and the SERV warning light will light up.When the minimum oil level is reached. On-board computer display After 30 seconds. When ignition has been switched on for approximately 30 seconds: . Turning left indicator light WWW. 14 13 12 Oil level display function The vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine should have been switched off for some time beforehand to obtain an accurate level reading.WS 12 . the dashes and the word “oil” flash. If it lights up when you are driving. press the button again. the display will toggle depending on the on-board computer: see the “on-board computer” paragraph in section 1. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. press the trip distance recorder reset button or the information scroll button on the on-board computer. Top up the level as soon as possible. To move to on-board computer reading. it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking system.MANUALS. without the anti-lock system. The squares which appear on the display indicate the level. The number of squares displayed reduces as the oil level drops and they are replaced by a dash. Examples of warning messages are given on the following pages. fault messages and warning messages.. In this event the messages are displayed in order of importance: warning messages are displayed first. . The information display 1 groups together information messages. See trip computer information in section 1. then fault messages.INFORMATION DISPLAY WWW.WS Information messages These can either help in the vehicle operation phase. Examples of fault messages are given on the following pages. The messages appear on the information display either individually or alternately (when there are several messages to be displayed). They may appear individually or may alternate with the SERVICE message on the display. or give information on the driving selection or state.. Warning messages These are red messages. they require a visit to your Renault Dealer in the near future for an operation on the vehicle.WS 1. They may appear alone or may alternate with the STOP message on the display. Fault messages 1 These are messages which appear in orange. They tell you to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow) and to call your Renault Dealer. With the exception of the washer fluid minimum level message. WWW. Some warning lights are accompanied by a spoken message for vehicles fitted with a voice synthesiser (see the voice synthesiser information in section 1).MANUALS.66 The display goes blank if the scroll button on the trip computer is moved. Examples of information messages are given on the following pages.MANUALS. INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of information messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission WWW.67 .WS "Cruise control" Cruise Control Selection (see information on "cruise control" in section 2) 1. "Speed Limiter" Speed Limiter Selection (see information on “speed limiter” in section 2) WWW.MANUALS.WS Message interpretation "Insert card" Request to insert the Renault Card in the card reader.MANUALS. "Diesel Pre-heating" Pre-heating (diesel engines) "Tyre Pressure OK" Tyre pressure OK. MANUALS. WWW.WS Message interpretation "Injection fault" "Automatic gearbox fault" Automatic transmission fault "Low Tyre Pressure" Low tyre pressure on one wheel: this example shows that the off-side rear tyre is slightly flat.WS 1. for example.INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of fault messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission WWW. when the emergency spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle (see information on tyre pressure monitoring system in section 2). "Sensor fault" Sensor fault: displayed.68 .MANUALS. It recommends that you visit your Renault Dealer soon. "Operational" Stop soon: this message may appear individually or together with one or more of the previous warning lights. WWW.WS 1.MANUALS.MANUALS.69 .WS Message interpretation "ESP off" Deactivation of the electronic stability program (ESP) and/or traction control system (see paragraphs concerned in section 2) "Screenwash". Fill up the tank as soon as possible.INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Examples of fault messages Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission WWW. Serious injection fault "Oil pressure" Oil pressure fault "Puncture" This example shows that the offside rear wheel has a puncture "Water temperature" Incorrect coolant temperature.WS Message interpretation "Switch off limiter".WS 1. WWW.MANUALS.70 .INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Warning messages These indicate that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow. Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission WWW.MANUALS. WWW. It indicates that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow.MANUALS.71 .WS Message interpretation "Battery charge fault" Battery charging fault "Low Tyre Pressure" Tyre pressure fault: this example shows that the right-hand rear wheel is very flat.WS 1. Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission WWW.INFORMATION DISPLAY (continued) Warning messages These indicate that it is essential to stop immediately and as soon as traffic conditions allow.MANUALS. "STOP" Stop Immediately: this message may appear individually or together with one or more of the previous warning lights. Button 2 General reset and trip mileage recorder reset button To reset the trip mileage recorder. Therefore. • You may also notice that the average fuel consumption increases when the vehicle is stationary and the engine idling. e) current fuel consumption. k) switching off the information display. j) recommended speed (speed limiter/cruise control). Interpreting certain values displayed after resetting The values showing average fuel consumption. This is normal.WS Button 3 Display selection key Keep pressing key 3 briefly to show the following information in sequence: a) total mileage recorder. .TRIP COMPUTER 1 2 3 WWW. Automatic zeroing The displays will be reset automatically when the maximum capacity of the memories is exceeded. the display must show the “trip mileometer” function. h) average speed. d) average consumption. WWW.MANUALS. For the first few miles after pressing the reset key you will notice: • that the range increases as you travel.The car stops accelerating. the range will increase.WS 1.The engine reaches its operating temperature (engine cold when start key pressed). b) trip mileage recorder.72 . f) estimated range. range and average speed will become more stable and reliable the further you travel since the last time the reset key was pressed. g) distance covered. 1 Display The location differs depending on the vehicle. i) mileage before oil change. Average fuel consumption may decrease when: . c) fuel used. if the average fuel consumption decreases.When you drive from a built up area on to the open road.MANUALS. This is normal since the module takes account of fuel used during idling. Display flashing Consult a Renault Dealer. . TRIP COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 WWW. WWW.MANUALS.WS d) Average consumption (in mpg and l/100 km) since the last reset. 1. c) Fuel used (in litres or gallons) since the last reset. b) Trip mileage recorder. The value is displayed after driving 400 metres and takes into consideration the distance travelled and the fuel used since the last time the reset button was pressed.73 .MANUALS.WS Interpreting the display a) Total mileage recorder. The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.74 . The value is displayed after driving 400 metres. g) Distance covered (in miles or km) since the last reset.MANUALS.WS Interpreting the display e) Current consumption (in mpg or litres/100 km) The value is displayed after reaching a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h). f) Estimated range with remaining fuel (in miles or km) This range takes into consideration the average fuel consumption since the last time the reset button was pressed. WWW.MANUALS.TRIP COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 WWW.WS 1. h) Average speed (in mph and km/h) since the last reset. Distance left before the next service. Press button 2 for more than five seconds. * The driving conditions. the value lights up and is stored. Resetting the display after servicing With the ignition switched on. The symbol flashes continously regardless of the information selected on the display. otherwise “mileage before oil change” is displayed continously) • mileage equal to 0 km or date of service reached.ON-BOARD COMPUTER (continued) Examples of display selections by pressing 3 WWW.MANUALS. Release the pressure on button 2. This flashes four times.WS Interpreting the display i) Mileage before oil change. 1. The symbol flashes (for 30 seconds if the display is not set to “mileage before oil change”.WS . weather conditions and road conditions may be different to those displayed by the trip computer depending on the country in which the vehicle is soldTo find out the mileage before oil change refer to the your vehicle's Servicing booklet which is the only reliable guide.75 WWW. 16874 16874 j) Cruise control or speed limiter recommended speed (depending on vehicle) See the information on “Speed limiter” and “Cruise control” in section 2. There are several cases: • range less than 1 000 miles (1 500 km) or next servicing date in two months.MANUALS. select the “mileage before oil change” information on the display. The value on the display flashes four times and is then replaced by the reset mileage before oil change value. injection automatic transmission .washer minimum level .seat belt not fastened .WS 1.tyre pressure fault/puncture .steering column locking system ... and in certain cases one or more warning lights will light up on the instrument panel.76 .electrical circuit .MANUALS.MANUALS.braking circuit .etc.engine oil minimum level .cruise control/speed limiter . This information covers both precautionary and advisory information.electronic stability programme (ESP) . The spoken information is relayed automatically and acts as a back-up for the visual information.door(s). luggage compartment.minimum fuel level . see the “instrument panel” section. WWW.variable power-assisted steering .lights on .incorrect operation of lights (side lights.oil pressure . WWW.VOICE SYNTHESISER The car speaks to you.WS Types of spoken information The type of spoken information depends on the vehicle equipment level and monitors the following functions: . In this case.handbrake on . The voice synthesiser keeps you constantly informed about the condition of the principal components of your vehicle.engine overheating . brake light…) . bonnet not correctly shut . If no defect is detected the spoken message will be “Welcome.WS 1.MANUALS. WWW.77 . the messages are replaced by a tone. press repeat key 1.WS “Repeat message” key Key 1 depressed Spoken information stored in the memory or present at the time of request will be repeated.VOICE SYNTHESISER (continued) WWW. If you press the repeat key while a message is being spoken. it will be interrupted and the entire message repeated. the vehicle’s computer is now checking systems for you”.MANUALS. 1 2 Controls connected with spoken information “Discrete” key Key 2 depressed In the “discrete” mode. If you want to hear the spoken message. We advise that these settings are not made when driving. The clock must be reset. If the electrical supply is cut (battery disconnected. Vehicles fitted with navigation systems. etc. Refer to the separate instructions for the function to understand the special features of this equipment.WS 1. H M The time and/or external temperature are displayed when the ignition is switched on. the °C characters flash (indicates risk of ice formation).78 .MANUALS.CLOCK AND EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE 1 WWW. Setting the time on the clock 1 Press: H for hours M for minutes External temperature indicator As ice formation is related to exposure. telephones. local hygrometry and temperature. etc.WS External temperature indicator Special note: When the external temperature is between -3°C and +3°C. the external temperature alone is not sufficient to detect ice. WWW.MANUALS. feed wire broken.). WS 1 Height and depth adjustment Lower lever 1 and place the steering wheel in the required position: lift the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. and avoid doing so when driving in general (as the power steering and brake servo will not function).79 Never leave the steering wheel on full lock when the vehicle is parked (as this could damage the power assisted steering pump).WS 1. only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary. WWW.MANUALS. . Never switch off the ignition when travelling downhill.STEERING WHEEL WWW.MANUALS. For safety reasons. A B D C 1 E Autodimming rear-view mirrors These automatically darken at night if you are being followed by a vehicle with its lights on. The objects in zone A look much further away than they really are. zone A increases the area you can see at the rear and to the side of your vehicle. turn knob 1: .WS 1 F De-icing rear-view mirror The rear-view mirrors are de-iced when rear screen demisting is switched on. To reset them to driving position.MANUALS. The external rear-view mirror on the driver's side has two clearly defined zones. Zone B is what can normally be seen in a conventional rear-view mirror. For your safety.EXTERNAL REAR-VIEW MIRRORS WWW.80 .Position C to adjust the left-hand rear-view mirror . Folding rear-view mirrors Move the button 1 at position F: the external rear-view mirrors fold. D or E. return to position C. WWW. External rear-view mirrors With the ignition on.MANUALS.Position E to adjust the right-hand rear-view mirror D is the central neutral position.WS 1. WS 1.81 .REAR-VIEW MIRRORS WWW. lower the small lever 1 located behind the rear-view mirror. Autodimming ror 2 rear-view mir- The rear-view mirror darkens automatically at night when you are followed by a vehicle with lights (main beam headlights).MANUALS.WS 2 1 Interior rear-view mirror This is adjustable. When driving at night.MANUALS. to avoid being dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle behind. WWW. It is to be used to warn other road users if you • are obliged to stop for any reason beyond your control in a forbidden location • are obliged to drive under particular conditions.HORN AND HAZARD LIGHTS WWW. There is an intermediate position in which the stalk may be held when changing lanes. even if the lights are not in use. It will return automatically to 0 when released. steering wheel Hazard warning lights Press switch 2. When driving on the motorway. Headlight flasher To flash your headlights. WWW. the steering wheel is not often turned enough to return the stalk automatically to position 0.WS 1.MANUALS.MANUALS.82 .WS 2 0 1 1 A Horn Press on the cushion A. Direction indicators Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering wheel and in the direction you are going to turn. This switch lights up all four direction indicators simultaneously. pull the stalk 1 towards you. Switching off the lights Turn the end of stalk 1 back to its original position. A light lights up on the instrument panel. check that the electrical equipment is in good condition and adjust the headlight beams (if your vehicle is not carrying its normal load).WS 3 1 “Lights on” warning buzzer A warning buzzer will sound when a front door is opened and the lights are left switched on after the ignition has been switched off (to prevent discharge of the battery). 1 2 Side lights Turn the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 3 opposite the symbol. pull the stalk towards you. move the towards you. To return to the dipped headlight position. The instrument panel will light up and the intensity may be adjusted by turning tumblewheel 2.MANUALS.MANUALS. Headlight main beam With the dipped beam headlights on.WS 1. When the main beam headlights are lit up.83 .EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND SIGNALS WWW. stalk Headlight dipped beams Turn the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 3 opposite the symbol. an indicator light lights up on the instrument panel. Before driving at night. WWW. EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (continued) WWW.MANUALS. and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel. and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.MANUALS. WWW.84 . Do not forget to switch off the rear fog light when it is no longer needed to avoid inconveniencing other road users. Operation of the front fog lights depends on the external lighting selected. Operation of the front fog lights depends on the external lighting selected. the front and rear fog lights will go out. 4 Front fog lights Turn the central ring of stalk 4 until the symbol appears opposite mark 5.WS 4 5 When the exterior lights are switched off. Rear fog lights Turn the central ring of stalk 4 until the symbol appears opposite mark 5.WS 1. MANUALS.ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT OF THE HEADLIGHTS WWW.WS 1.WS A Command A allows the height of the beams to be adjusted in relation to the load.MANUALS. WWW.85 . Turn control A down to lower the headlights and up to raise them. MANUALS. turn handle 1 • A off • B intermittent wiping The wipers will pause for several seconds between sweeps. When the vehicle is stationary: If stalk switch 1 is operated. 1 A B C D Vehicle fitted with intermittent windscreen wiper With the ignition on. the system detects the presence of water on the windscreen and triggers wiping at a suitable wiping speed. As soon as the vehicle moves off. wiping will return to the speed originally selected.86 WWW. Note: If for any reason the wipers cannot move (e. turn handle 1 • A off • B “rain sensor” position When this position is selected. . it is vital that you return to the park position A to return to the rain sensor position. • from normal wiping speed the speed will change to intermittent wiping. stuck to windscreen by ice).WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE WWW. the wiping speed is reduced to a lower speed when the vehicle stops: • from fast wiping speed the speed will change to normal wiping speed.MANUALS. It is possible to vary the time between sweeps by turning the central ring on the stalk switch 1. • C continuous slow wiping • D continuous fast wiping 1.WS Vehicle fitted with windscreen wiper with rain sensor With the ignition on.g. it overrides and cancels automatic operation.WS Each time the ignition is switched off. the system will automatically cut off the power supply to the wipers. • C continuous slow wiping • D continuous fast wiping Vehicles with automatic selection of wiping speed If a wiping speed is selected when driving. WWW. In frosty weather.WINDSCREEN WASHER / WIPER (continued) WWW. • Car lights on The headlight washers will be activated at the same time.MANUALS.WS 1 Windscreen washer. make sure the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating). headlight washers With the ignition on.MANUALS.87 . pull the stalk 1 towards you. If you switch off the ignition before switching off the windscreen wiper (position A) the blades will stop anywhere on the windscreen. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year).WS 1. Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. • Car lights off The windscreen washer will be activated. move the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 2 opposite the symbol. extend them fully and keep them in that position for as long as necessary. When the stalk is released. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year).WS 2 In frosty weather. it returns to the rear wiping position.88 .REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE WWW. The rear screen wiper arm cannot be completely removed: if you have to extend them to clean the rear screen for example.WS 1. 1 1 Rear screen wiper with timer With the ignition on. Rear screen wash/wipe With the ignition on. make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating).MANUALS. Special note The rear screen is wiped once if reverse gear is selected when the windscreen wipers are in operation. Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. move the end of stalk 1 to align with mark 2 opposite the symbol.MANUALS. WWW. Make sure that no water enters the fuel tank accidentally during filling. make sure the new cap is of the same type. Consult your Renault Dealer. Diesel version Use diesel engine fuel (DERV) only. There is a cap holder 1 on the fuel filler flap for holding the cap when filling the tank.WS 1 Fuel grade Petrol version Use fuel which corresponds to the appropriate octane rating as defined by the particular standards in force in each country. Also. Useful capacity of fuel tank: Approx. WWW.MANUALS.4 gallons). The diesel fuel must be high quality. The fuel filler cap and neck must be clean and dust-free.FUEL TANK WWW. Fuel filler cap: this is of a special type. press the hinge to open it.WS 1.MANUALS. If you have to change it. To open the flap A.89 . do not mix even small amounts of petrol with diesel. A See “Engine Specifications”. Never handle the cap near a source of heat or a flame. Rapeseed oil must not be used under any circumstances. 70 litres (15. Using leaded petrol will damage the anti-pollution system and may lead to a loss of warranty. fuel circuit.90 .FUEL TANK (continued) Filling with fuel WWW.WS Filling with fuel (continued) Petrol and diesel versions No more than two filling operations may be made after the fuel feed has switched off automatically for the first time because there must be sufficient space in the fuel tank to allow for expansion. injector. • switch on the hazard warning lights and ask your passengers to leave the vehicle and stay clear of the traffic. .. WWW. wiring.Insert the nozzle as far as it will go and so as to open the valve.Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation. To ensure the fuel tank is not filled with leaded petrol.. protective covers.WS 1.MANUALS.MANUALS. .) is strictly forbidden due to the safety risks it may cause (except for qualified staff from the Renault network. If a persistent fuel odour appears you should: • stop the vehicle if traffic conditions allow and switch off the ignition. Petrol versions Only use unleaded petrol. Persistent fuel odour Your vehicle has a pressurised fuel supply circuit. • do not operate on or restart the vehicle before it has been inspected by qualified staff from the Renault network. the fuel tank filler neck contains a restrictor fitted with a valve which only allows the nozzle for unleaded petrol to be used (at the pump). Any operation or modification on the fuel supply system (computers. 12 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ........................04 2.................................10 2.......................................07 2..........................................................................................................25 Cruise control ..................................................... Power assisted steering ....................................... 2........ 2.....MANUALS..................................................................... Starting and stopping the engine ................................................................(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment) WWW.............................................................................................02 2.............23 2........................................ 2...................... 2...................................................................................................................05 2............ Special features of diesel versions ......WS Section 2: Driving Running in / Ignition switch ................... 2.......................................................................................22 Emergency braking assistance ........................ Using the automatic gearbox ...................................24 2...........................................................................................................20 Anti-lock brake system: ABS .........................................27 2..................... Speed limiter ......................21 2...............MANUALS..34 2.....................................30 2...................................................07 2................... 2.............................17 2........................................................... Tyre pressure monitoring system ...............06 2.............................. 2......................................................... 2................08 Environment ............................11 2.................... Handbrake .................................................18 Traction control system ...........................................................03 2.WS 2.................31 2..............02 Special features of petrol versions ....................................................... Advice on anti-pollution and how to economise on fuel .......................................................................................28 Parking aid .............................................................................. 2..............................32 WWW...........................................................................................................................................................................19 2...................................................................... Gear lever ..........................................................................01 ...................................... it is only after 1500 miles (3000 km) have been covered that you may reasonably expect full performance. For top of the range versions a message “insert card” will appear on the instrument panel information display. For the first 625 miles (1000 km) do not exceed 70 mph (130 km/h) in the highest gear or 3000 to 3500 rpm. On completion of 625 miles (1000 km) you may use your car normally.. WWW. the Renault Card reader 1 lights up.. however. the car will only provide top performance after approximately 4000 miles (6000 km).) operate when the engine is not running. do not exceed 2500 rpm.MANUALS..).WS 2. gear selected..RUNNING IN Petrol version WWW. 1 When the door is opened. “Starting the engine” position (Second position) Once the Renault Card is fully inserted in the card reader 1 (when you hear the unlocking noise from the steering column). Special circumstance In some cases it will be necessary to move the steering wheel while pressing button 2 to unlock the steering column.MANUALS. Service intervals: see the vehicle's servicing booklet. Insert the Renault Card in the card reader 1 which has two positions: the first corresponds to the “accessories” position and the second to the “starting the engine” position.02 . Diesel version For the first 750 miles (1500 km). Note: button 2 is not lit if you are not in the starting condition (for example: diesel pre-heating. Indicator light A lights up to confirm that the engine is running. On completion of this mileage you may drive faster. do not accelerate hard while the engine is still cold and do not let the engine rev in the lower gears. button 2 lights up to confirm authorisation to start the engine: press briefly on button 2 to start.WS A 2 A STARTING THE ENGINE “Accessories” position (First position) The accessories (radio. Service intervals: see the vehicle's servicing booklet. During the running in period. However. On some vehicles with automatic transmission. the courtesy lights will light up (if these are set to “automatic lighting up”). never leave it unattended with the Renault Card inserted in the reader. and the card reader will flash as a warning.03 . He or she could start the engine or operate electrical equipment such as the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be injured (by trapping his or her neck.MANUALS. Remove the card from the card reader 1. Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” paragraph in section 5.). Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has stopped completely. Once the engine starts. WWW. Once the engine has stopped.MANUALS. the power steering.WS 2. arm. When you remove the card from the card reader. press briefly on button 2: the ignition is switched off and the “engine running” indicator light A goes out. If there is a child (or animal) in the vehicle. wait until the pre-heating indicator light on the instrument panel has gone Once the vehicle is stationary. etc. shift the lever to the park position P. the steering column will lock and the accessories will switch off. Risk of serious injury. Note: a beep will let you know if you have left the card in the card reader when you open the driver's door. WWW. brake servo and the passive safety devices such as air bags and pretensioners will no longer operate. button 2 goes out and the “engine running” indicator light A lights up (the Renault Card is then locked in the card reader which goes out).WS out before pushing button 2. When the Renault Card is removed the steering will lock. hand. Special circumstances The “engine emergency stop” fuse in the engine compartment may be used if the engine cannot be stopped.STARTING THE ENGINE (continued) / STOPPING THE ENGINE “Starting the engine” position Stopping the engine (continued) For diesel versions. WWW. If the fault cannot be identified.SPECIAL POINTS . do not keep trying to start the engine (using the ignition key.MANUALS. running out of fuel or spark plug disconnected indicated by the engine misfiring and snatching when driving • loss of power may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and thus reduce its efficiency or even destroy it and cause heat damage to the vehicle WWW. These faults may be avoided by taking your vehicle regularly to your Renault Dealer at the intervals specified in your Servicing booklet.WS If you note any of the above faults. or by pushing or towing the vehicle) without having identified and corrected the starting fault.MANUALS. do not persist in attempting to start the engine and call a Renault Dealer. have the necessary repairs carried out as soon as possible by your Renault Dealer. Do not park the vehicle or run the engine in locations where combustible substances or materials such as grass or leaves can come into contact with a hot exhaust system.PETROL VERSIONS The following operating conditions: • Driving for a long time with the low fuel level warning light lit up • Using leaded petrol • Using lubrication additives or fuel which is not approved by Renault Or faults such as: • faulty ignition. Starting problems To avoid damaging the catalytic converter.04 .WS 2. if after a few seconds and several attempts the engine fails to start. if the vehicle is used regularly over short distances (cold engine). on condition that the battery is fully charged. WWW.SPECIAL POINTS . WWW. the engine may be started normally: see the information on the fuel tank in section 1 to find out more about the special features of diesel versions fitted with common-rail (high pressure) injection. down to –5°C. • Always keep the fuel tank relatively full to avoid water vapour condensing in it and accumulating at the bottom of the tank.WS Precautions to be taken in winter To avoid any damage in icy weather: • Ensure the battery is always fully charged. Lack of fuel After filling the tank if you have run completely out of fuel.05 .DIESEL VERSIONS Diesel engine speed Diesel engines are fitted with injection equipment which prevents overrevving of the engine irrespective of the gear in use. contact a Renault Dealer.MANUALS.MANUALS.WS 2. Vehicles with diesel fuel heater This equipment enables diesel fuel to be used with no additives down to –18°C or. However. WS 2. with ignition on. Vehicle fitted with parking aid: see the information on the parking aid in section 2 to find out more about the special features.WS 1 2 1 To select reverse gear With the vehicle stationary.MANUALS.GEAR LEVER WWW.MANUALS. move the gear selector lever into neutral then into reverse. WWW. lift ring 2 against the gear lever to select reverse. depending on the vehicle. follow the grid drawn on knob 1 and. The reversing lights will light up as soon as reverse gear is selected. Vehicle with manual gearbox: depending on the vehicle.06 . MANUALS.HANDBRAKE WWW. make sure that the handbrake is properly applied so that the vehicle does not move unintentionally. Steering is easier during parking manoeuvres (for added comfort) whilst the force rises progressively as speed increases (for enhanced safety at high speeds). press button 1 and then lower the lever to the floor.WS . never leave the steering wheel on full lock when the vehicle is parked as this may damage the pump. The lever should travel about 10 notches to hold the vehicle. To release: Pull the lever up slightly. The red warning light on the instrument panel will light up if you are driving with an incorrectly released handbrake.MANUALS. Variable power assisted steering The variable power assisted steering system is equipped with an electronic control system which alters the level of assistance to suit the vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stationary. and avoid doing so when driving in general (power steering and brake servo will not function). Make sure the handbrake is properly released when driving. POWER ASSISTED STEERING When power assisted steering is fitted. Never switch off the ignition when travelling downhill.WS 1 To apply Pull the lever up.07 WWW. 2. Your vehicle is fitted with self-adjusting rear brake shoes and the handbrake should only be adjusted during a brake overhaul. otherwise overheating may occur. 08 . • Spark plugs: Optimum conditions of use. moderate fuel consumption and initial settings. diesel filter: A clogged element hinders output and must be changed. WWW.ADVICE ON ANTI-POLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL.MANUALS. The fuel consumption of your car and the level of pollutant exhaust gas emissions are very much within your control. WWW. • Injection pump setting: It must be set to the recommended values. your Renault conforms to current anti-pollution standards. If the spark plugs have to be changed. the replacement of parts of the engine. however. cannot achieve all. Make sure that your vehicle is maintained correctly. Technical design. Your Renault Dealer has all the equipment necessary for ensuring that your vehicle is maintained to its original standard. By virtue of its design. Consult your Renault Dealer for this information. Have your vehicle checked and adjusted by your Renault Dealer in accordance with the instructions in the vehicle’s servicing booklet. Engine adjustments • Ignition: This does not require adjustment. DRIVING RENAULT is actively participating in the reduction of pollutant exhaust gas emissions and in saving energy. use the make. use it carefully and watch your driving style. Always remember that the emission of pollutant fumes is directly linked to fuel consumption.WS 2. type and gap specified for your vehicle's engine. fuel supply system and exhaust by parts other than those originally recommended by the manufacturer may alter your vehicle such that it no longer complies with anti-pollution standards. • Idling speed: This does not require adjustment. performance and output demand that the specifications laid down by our design office be rigorously adhered to.WS Maintenance It should be noted that failure to respect anti-pollution standards may lead to legal action being taken against the vehicle owner. • Air filter.MANUALS. In addition. Consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. This warning light on the instrument panel will indicate if there are any problems with the system: This lights up when the ignition is switched on and goes out after 3 seconds. •Do not overrev the engine in the intermediate gears. •Double declutching and accelerating before switching off are superfluous actions in modern cars. If this system malfunctions. reduce the engine speed until the light stops flashing. On versions with automatic transmission. toxic substances may be released into the atmosphere or mechanical damage may occur. 2. accelerate no more than you would on the level. . it is preferable to keep the gear lever in position “D”. Driving •Drive carefully for the first few miles until the engine reaches its normal operating temperature.WS •Bad weather. Always use the highest ratio possible without labouring the engine. Keep your foot in the same position on the accelerator pedal. •Brake as little as possible by suitably anticipating an obstacle or bend and then simply lifting the accelerator pedal. consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. . •“Sporty” driving uses a lot of fuel: drive with a “light right foot”.WS The exhaust gas monitoring system will detect any malfunctioning of the vehicle's exhaust gas depollution system.ADVICE ON ANTIPOLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL.If it flashes. •Speed is expensive. rather than let it warm up while the car is stationary. DRIVING (continued) Monitoring exhaust gas WWW.If it lights up continuously. •Avoid fierce acceleration.MANUALS. •Do not try to maintain the same speed up a hill. WWW. flooded roads Do not drive through floods if the depth of water is above the lower edge of the wheel rims.MANUALS.09 . General hints • Electricity is “fuel”. • Do not leave an empty roof rack in position. However. (with safety always in mind). fit a wind deflector and adjust it carefully.MANUALS. • Avoid using the car for door-to-door calls (short journeys with long waits in between) because the engine never reaches its normal operating temperature. switch off all the electrical units which are not really needed. Try to group your calls. Driving with the windows open at 100 km/h will increase fuel consumption by +4%. • Never fill the fuel tank right to the brim as this is wasteful.10 . keep your lights on when the visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).ADVICE ON ANTIPOLLUTION AND HOW TO ECONOMISE ON FUEL. • When towing a caravan.MANUALS. Tyres • Pressures which are too low may increase fuel consumption. • The use of non-recommended tyres may also increase fuel consumption.WS 2. DRIVING (continued) WWW. WWW. • It is better to fit a trailer for bulky objects. the extra fuel consumed in urban cycle can be as high as 2 litres per 100 km: switch the system off when it is not needed.WS • For vehicles with air conditioning. • Try to use the air vents. • Your vehicle comprises 90 % recyclable parts or materials and already contains numerous parts in plastic or recycled materials (see drawing above).) and oil cans (empty or filled with oil . We have also reduced the quantity of chlorine by 40 % in relation to previous models. comply with local legislation.. (The active carbon filter prevents vapour from the petrol tank being released into the open air. In all cases.) with household waste.WS 2. Do not dispose of parts worn and replaced in the course of routine vehicle maintenance (battery. your the paint and brake pads on your vehicle are unleaded and do not contain cadmium.. air filter. a lambda sensor and an active carbon filter.MANUALS. oil filter. cells. Make your contribution towards protection of the environment too. Dispose of them through specialist organisations. All the plastic components have been marked to make it easier to identify them for recycling.ENVIRONMENT Parts which can be recycled WWW.11 .WS • To help protect the environment. WWW. • The majority of versions are equipped with a depollution system including a catalytic converter.MANUALS.. Recycled parts Your vehicle has been designed with the aim of caring for the environment.) • RENAULT has implemented all its knowledge of recycling to keep damage to the environment to a minimum to benefit the service life of your vehicle. WWW. For certain vehicles. assume an increase of 0. the function does not take the place of the driver. The driver is constantly informed of the correct tyre pressure and possible variations on display A.2 to 0. However. It cannot. under any circumstances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver. Never deflate a hot tyre. the information display B supplements this information by specifying the tyre pressures when ignition is switched on (for approximately 20 seconds) or if there is a fault when driving. If tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold. WWW.TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM This system continuously monitors the tyre pressures. including the emergency spare wheel. Check the tyre pressures. Each wheel (except the emergency spare wheel) has a sensor.MANUALS.3 bar. integrated in the inflation valve which periodically measures the tyre pressure.MANUALS. once a month.12 . Operating principle This function is an additional driving aid.WS 2.WS A B Tyre pressures should be adjusted when the tyres are cold. therefore. TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) WWW. The pressure which is displayed on the information display B may therefore be different from the pressure read on the pressure gauge used. if necessary) which surrounds each valve: .E : red ring .F : green ring WWW.C : yellow ring . The operating pressure gauges show the pressure measurement variances (known as tolerance).13 . warning messages on the instrument panel and/or values read on the information display B are updated once you exceed 12 mph (25 km/h). The pressure displayed on the information display should be used. we advise you to consult your Renault Dealer.MANUALS.D : black ring . see the colour of the ring 2 (after cleaning. Non-interchangeability of wheels Each of the sensors integrated in the valve 1 is devoted to one single wheel: under no circumstances should you swap the wheels.WS 2. 1 1 2 F E Reading the tyre pressures on the instrument panel (if fitted) After the vehicle's tyre pressures have been checked.MANUALS. To mark the correct position of the wheel.WS C D Fitting tyres (replacing tyres or fitting winter tyres) As there are special precautions to be taken when replacing tyres. There is a risk of false information leading to serious consequences. WWW.vehicles fitted display A.TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Spare wheel The emergency spare wheel does not have a sensor and is thus not detected by the system. the system detects a fault.WS 2. etc. WWW. Consult your Renault Dealer to find out which accessories are compatible with the system and which are available from Renault accessory outlets: use of any other accessory may impair the operation of the system. Display The display A and. the warning lights on the instrument panel or the information display B give information on possible faults (flat tyre.. When it is fitted in the place of another wheel. only with Tyre repair aerosols As a result of the special wheels. punctured tyre. depending on the vehicle. only products approved by Renault's Technical Department may be used.MANUALS.vehicles fitted with display A and information display B.. hubcaps.).).MANUALS.WS A B Replacing wheels / rims. etc. This system requires special equipment (wheels. system out of service.14 . . The following pages show the breakdown of the illumination of various warning lights for: . replace the wheel concerned or call your Renault Dealer. check the tyre pressures. steady light + faulty wheel(s) not lit up Meaning: System fault (if.MANUALS.WS faulty wheel(s) flashing Examples of illumination of warning lights on the instrument panel and display flashing + steady light + Meaning: the flashing wheel is slight flat or over-inflated.MANUALS. stop as soon as possible and check the tyre pressures.). the emergency spare wheel is fitted or winter tyres are fitted. flashing + steady light + steady light + faulty wheel(s) flashing Meaning: puncture.15 .. flashing + steady light + faulty wheel(s) flashing Meaning: the flashing wheel is very flat. Slow down or inflate the tyres to the full load pressure (see the “tyre pressures” table).WS 2. lit up Meaning: Driving speed is not suited to the tyre pressures. for example. WWW.TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted only with display A WWW.. Slow down or inflate the tyres to the full load pressure (see the “tyre pressures” table).). Information display B Display A Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Examples of information which may be displayed on the display A and the information display B. check the tyre pressures.. "Sensor fault" System fault (if. WWW.WS Message interpretation "Tyre pressure OK" The tyre pressure is correct.MANUALS. slow down and check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. "Check tyre pressure" the flashing wheel is slightly flat or over-inflated. the emergency spare wheel is fitted or winter tyres are fitted.. "Tyre pressure" Driving speed is not suited to the tyre pressure.MANUALS. for example.TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted with display A and information display B.WS 2. "Low Tyre Pressure" The flashing wheel is flat or over-inflated.16 . WWW. WS 2.MANUALS. WWW.TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (continued) Vehicles fitted with display A and information display B. stop as soon as possible to check the tyre pressures or call your Renault Dealer "Puncture" Replace the wheel concerned or call your Renault Dealer.17 . Information display B Display A Vehicle with manual gearbox Vehicle with automatic transmission Examples of information which may be displayed on the display A and the information display B. WWW.WS Message interpretation "Low tyre pressure" The flashing wheel is very flat.MANUALS. MANUALS.ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM: ESP This system helps you to keep control of the vehicle in “critical” driving conditions (avoiding an obstacle.). thus.WS 1 When the function is in operation. Other sensors throughout the vehicle measure the actual path. WWW.WS 2.. the function does not take the place of the driver. However. The system compares the path selected by the driver and the actual vehicle path and corrects this as necessary by applying the brakes selectively and/or acting on the engine power. WWW. This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions.18 . under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). A Operating principle A sensor in the steering wheel detects the path selected by the driver.MANUALS.. It can. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. loss of grip in a bend. indicator light 1 flashes or ESP message A (depending on the vehicle) lights up. 19 . there are two illumination possibilities on the instrument panel (depending on vehicle): . Correct this as soon as possible by pressing button 2 again.warning lights 1 and 3 light up. As the ESP offers additional safety. This action also deactivates the traction control mechanism: see the information on the traction control system in section 2.MANUALS. it is recommended that you do not drive when the function is disabled.the information display alternates between the two C “ESP fault” and D “Operational”.MANUALS. In both cases.WS 2. Faults If the system detects a fault. WWW.ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM: ESP (continued) 1 WWW. . consult your Renault Dealer. Note: ESP is automatically reactivated when the ignition is switched on.WS 1 3 2 B C D Disabling the function The function is deactivated by pressing on button 2 and indicator light 1 or message B “ESP off” (depending on vehicle) will light up to confirm this. When the function is in operation. WWW. thus. WWW. independently of the force applied to the accelerator pedal.WS 1 The system also adjusts the engine speed to the grip available under the wheels. If a wheel is tending to skid. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly.TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM This system helps to limit skidding on drive wheels and to control the vehicle when pulling away or accelerating.MANUALS.MANUALS. It can. the function does not take the place of the driver.WS 2. This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions. under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). A Operating principle The system uses sensors in the wheels to constantly measure and compare the speed of the drive wheels and prevents them spinning. However.20 . the system brakes automatically until the drive delivered becomes compatible with the level of grip. indicator light 1 flashes or ESP message A lights up (depending on the vehicle). TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (continued) WWW.MANUALS.WS 1 3 1 2 B C D Disabling the function In some situations (driving on very wet ground: snow, mud,... or driving with chained wheels), the system may reduce the engine power to limit skidding. If this is not required, it is possible to deactivate the function by pressing switch 2. Warning light 1 or message B “ESP OFF” (depending on the vehicle) lights up. Disabling the traction control function also deactivates the ESP function: refer to the information on the ESP path control in section 2. Correct this as soon as possible by pressing switch 2 again. Note: traction control is automatically reactivated when the ignition is switched on. Faults If the system detects a fault, there are two illumination possibilities on the instrument panel (depending on vehicle): - warning lights 1 and 3 light up; - the information display alternates between the two messages C “ESP fault” and D “Operational”. In both cases, consult your Renault Dealer. WWW.MANUALS.WS 2.21 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM: ABS When braking sharply, the two main aims are to reduce the stopping distance and keep your vehicle under control. However, there is a risk that road holding and directional control may be lost and the wheels may lock when braking, depending on the nature of the ground, weather conditions and your reactions. The anti-lock braking system (ABS) has been designed to combat this danger. The safety enhancement is that the brake control system prevents the wheels from locking, even if the brakes are applied too sharply, and allows the vehicle to be steered and thus its direction to be controlled. Under these circumstances it is quite possible for the driver to steer the vehicle and to avoid an obstacle whilst at the same time applying the brake. WWW.MANUALS.WS This system also allows you to optimise stopping distances when the adhesion of one or more wheels becomes hazardous (wet roads, slippery or varying road surfaces). Although this system allows you to make maximum use of stopping distances, even with the ABS you still have to take account of the actual condition of the road surface. It is still essential to follow the rules of good driving practice (such as driving at a safe distance to the vehicle in front). The fact that the vehicle’s safety has been increased should not encourage you to take risks. When the system has been activated, you will feel a certain degree of pulsation at the brake pedal. These tangible signs will warn you that the adhesion between the tyres and the ground has reached its limit and enable you to adapt your driving style to suit the road conditions. WWW.MANUALS.WS 2.22 ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM: ABS (continued) Two situations must be considered if there is a fault in the ABS system 1 - The orange warning light is lit up on the instrument panel. The braking system operates in the same way as for a vehicle not equipped with an ABS system. Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. 2 - The orange warning light and the red brake circuit fault indicator light are lit up on the instrument panel. This indicates that both the braking system and the ABS system are faulty. Your vehicle brakes may still partially operate. However, it is dangerous to brake suddenly and it is essential to stop immediately, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Contact your Renault Dealer as a matter or urgency. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 2.23 The braking control provided by the anti-lock braking system is independent of the effort applied to the brake pedal. In an emergency, apply continuous pressure to the brake pedal - there is no need to pump it repeatedly. EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSISTANCE This is a system in addition to ABS which helps reduce the vehicle stopping distances. WWW.MANUALS.WS Operating principle The system detects an emergency braking situation by means of a sensor which measures the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. In this case, braking assistance instantly reaches its maximum power and allows ABS regulation to be reached as quickly as possible. ABS braking is maintained as long as the brake pedal is not released. Illumination of hazard warning lights These may light up in the event of rapid deceleration. This function is an additional aid in the event of critical driving conditions to allow the behaviour of the vehicle to be adapted to the driving conditions. However, the function does not take the place of the driver. It does not increase the vehicle's limitations and should not encourage you to drive more quickly. It can, thus, under no circumstances replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring the vehicle (the driver must always be aware of sudden incidents which may occur when driving). WWW.MANUALS.WS 2.24 in town driving or in areas with speed restriction (roadworks). This may be useful.SPEED LIMITER: limiter function WWW. information on the speed stored appears on the instrument panel: either in the on-board computer 6 or the information display 7 “Speed limiter”.CRUISE CONTROL . etc. Indicator light This orange indicator light lights up on the instrument panel to indicate that the limiter function is in operation.MANUALS. for example. The system operates above a driving speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). 4 Switching the function off (with stored limited speed) 5 Limited speed initiating switch and adjustment of limited speed (decreasing).WS 16874 6 2 1 5 3 4 7 The speed limiter function allows you to decide on a maximum driving speed.25 . Controls 1 Main “On/Off” switch 2 Limited speed initiating switch and adjustment of limited speed (increasing).WS 2.MANUALS. WWW. Depending on the vehicle. 3 Return to stored limited speed. Changing the limited speed The limited speed may be changed by acting (pressing frequently or continuously) on: .MANUALS. Limiting the speed At a stable speed (approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h) and in the correct gear (for vehicles with manual gearboxes).26 . press switch 2: the speed is stored.CRUISE CONTROL . press on the accelerator pedal until you reach the limited speed.SPEED LIMITER: limiter function (continued) WWW.MANUALS. WWW. The indicator light lights up on the instrument panel and. 2 1 5 Switching on Push side switch 1. no effort on the accelerator pedal will allow you to exceed the programmed speed except in an emergency (see information on “exceeding the limited speed”). the on-board computer or the information display shifts into “speed limiter” operation.WS 2.key 5 to reduce speed. . depending on the vehicle. From this point.WS Driving When a limited speed is stored.key 2 to increase speed. MANUALS.MANUALS. release the accelerator pedal: the speed limiter function will return as soon as you reach a speed lower than the limited speed before the emergency.SPEED LIMITER: limiter function (continued) Exceeding the limited speed WWW.CRUISE CONTROL .key 4. To do this: depress the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (beyond the “point of resistance”).27 . the speed will flash on the instrument panel (information display or on-board computer). It is possible to return to a speed stored by pressing key 3. in this case the limited speed remains stored . in this case the limited speed is no longer stored.key 1.WS In the event of an emergency It is possible to exceed the limited speed at any moment. WWW. Impossible to operate at the limited speed If the limited speed cannot be maintained by the system (for example in the event of a steep incline). The speed flashes on the instrument panel (information display or on-board computer) to inform you that the limited speed is being exceeded. Confirmation that the function has been switched off is given when the indicator light on the instrument panel goes out. When the emergency has passed.WS 2. 3 1 4 Switching the function off The speed limiter function interrupted when you press: is Return to limited speed. . CRUISE CONTROL . This is called the “cruising speed”. the cruise control allows you to take your foot off the accelerator while your car continues to cruise at the speed you have selected. WWW.WS 2. Controls 1 Main “On/Off” switch 2 Cruising speed storage switch and adjustment of limited speed (increasing) 3 Return to stored cruising speed 4 Switching the function off (with stored cruising speed) 5 Cruising speed storage switch and adjustment of limited speed (decreasing) Indicator light This green indicator light lights up on the instrument panel to indicate that the cruising function is in operation. This cruising speed may be set at any speed at speeds of 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.28 . information on the speed stored appears on the instrument panel: either in the on-board computer 6 or the information display 7 “Speed limiter”.WS 16874 6 2 1 5 4 7 3 When road conditions permit (fluid or motorway traffic).SPEED LIMITER: cruising function WWW.MANUALS. Depending on the vehicle.MANUALS. MANUALS.SPEED LIMITER: cruising function (continued) WWW. When the emergency has passed.WS 2 Exceeding the cruise control speed In the event of an emergency The cruise control speed may be exceeded at any time by pressing the accelerator pedal. the speed will flash on the instrument panel (information display or trip computer). press switch 2: the speed is stored. WWW.MANUALS.CRUISE CONTROL . Changing the cruise control speed The cruise control speed may be changed by acting (pressing repeatedly or continuously) on: . Driving When a cruise control speed is stored you can lift your foot off the accelerator pedal. Activating cruise control At a stable speed (approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h) and in the correct gear (for vehicles with manual gearboxes). depending on the vehicle. the on-board computer or the information display enters “cruise control” mode.WS 2. Impossible to operate at the speed selected If the cruise control speed cannot be maintained by the system (for example in the event of a steep slope).29 . The speed flashes on the instrument panel (information display or trip computer) to inform you that the cruise control speed is being exceeded.key 5 to reduce speed. . release the accelerator pedal: your vehicle will automatically return to the speed previously selected and the indicator light will go out.key 2 to increase speed. 1 5 Switching on Press side switch 1 The indicator light lights up in the instrument panel and. press the brake pedal. This function is an additional aid to driving. However. .MANUALS.Press key 1. 2.30 Return to cruising speed A stored speed can be recalled by pressing key 3 if you are driving at a speed of approximately 20 mph or 30 km/h.WS . in this case the selected speed is no longer stored.SPEED LIMITER: cruising function (continued) WWW. in this case the selected speed remains stored . WWW.CRUISE CONTROL .MANUALS.WS 3 1 4 Switching the function off The function is switched off when you: . the function does not take the place of the driver.depress the clutch pedal or shift to neutral for vehicles with automatic transmission. Confirmation that the function has been switched off is given when the indicator light on the instrument panel goes out. Under no circumstances should it replace observation of speed limits nor vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.Press key 4. . Consult your Renault Dealer... animal.MANUALS. very narrow post.WS 2. Towing a trailer or caravan Each time you select reverse gear. until they become a continuous beep when the obstacle is approximately 25 centimetres from the vehicle.. Under no circumstances should it replace vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver when reversing. This function is an additional aid which indicates the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle when reversing by means of sound signals..). snow.MANUALS. Faults When the system detects a fault a beep sounds for 5 seconds as a warning when reverse gear is selected. pram or bicycle.) when manoeuvring. The driver should always pay attention to sudden faults which may occur when driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles (such as a child. mud. etc.WS Proximity sensors located in the rear bumper “measure” the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle when reversing. In this case it is possible to deactivate the function by installing a switch: please contact your Renault Dealer. Note: make sure that the proximity sensors are not blocked (dirt.PARKING AID Operating principle WWW. This measurement is indicated by sonic beeps which become more frequent the closer you become to the vehicle.31 . the system automatically detects an obstacle.) or an obstacle which is too small or narrow (average sized stone. WWW. WS A B Driving With the gear lever in position P or N. Foot on the brake and accelerator pedal released. For safety reasons. you will not have to touch the gear selector lever again: the gear changing will take place automatically at the right time and at the most suitable engine speed because the automatic system takes into account the vehicle load and road surface and adjusts itself to the particular driving style you have chosen. shift from position P.32 . P: Park R: Reverse N: Neutral D: Automatic mode M:Manual mode 8: display of gear engaged in manual mode : warning light to request you press the brake pedal to shift from position P : warning light requesting lever to be positioned at P or N. it is essential to apply the brake before pressing the unlocking button 2 to shift out of the P position. With your foot on the brake pedal (the warning light goes out).AUTOMATIC GEARBOX WWW. 1 2 Selector lever 1 Indicator strip A or. the information display B informs you of the position of the lever 1. Driving in automatic mode Select position D. switch on the ignition.WS 2. WWW. depending on the vehicle. The lever must only be engaged in D or R when the vehicle is stationary.MANUALS. In the majority of traffic conditions.MANUALS. 33 . bring the lever to the left: indicator light M and the gear selected light up on the instrument panel. This will activate the “kickdown” switch giving a change down to a lower gear. . pull the lever to the rear. push the lever forwards. Successive movements of the lever 1 allow you to change gears manually.g.WS 1 A B Driving in manual mode With the gear lever 1 in position D.AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (continued) Accelerating and overtaking Fully depress the accelerator pedal quickly (until you pass the point of resistance). Likewise. operation of the electronic stability program: ESP) the automated system may change the gear automatically. WWW.to move down through the gears.: engine protection.to move up through the gears.MANUALS. . The gear selected appears on the instrument panel: either on the indicator strip A or on the information display B (depending on the vehicle). Special cases In certain driving conditions (e.WS 2.MANUALS. the gear change may be refused by the automated system: in this case the gear display flashes for a few seconds as a warning. WWW. to prevent incorrect manoeuvres. WS . - WWW. Press the accelerator pedal lightly to ensure gear changes at comparatively low engine speeds. the level can be released manually.AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (continued) How to drive as economically as possible Leave the selector in position D (drive) on the open road. see the information on towing in section 5. Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. To do this. . Consult a Renault Dealer as soon as possible. start the engine and wait a few seconds before moving the selector lever from position P or N and engaging it in D or R to prevent the engine stalling.g. WWW. change to manual mode and select second gear (or even third) before starting the engine to avoid wheel spin when starting. keeping your foot on the brake pedal.: in mountains). move the lever to position P (park): the gearbox is in neutral and the drive wheels are mechanically locked by the transmission. and while driving.In cold weather. avoid leaving the gear lever in position D (or R) when stopping in traffic: always return to position N when you have to stop.If the bends and hills on the road do not allow you to stay in automatic mode (e.Vehicle not fitted with traction control: on a slippery surface. Press the button located underneath the gaiter and at the same time press the unlocking button 2 to move the lever from position P. . This will prevent successive gear changes by the automatic gearbox when climbing. if these warning lights come on at the same time. . 2.MANUALS.If the gear lever becomes jammed in position P even though you are pressing the brake pedal. it is recommended that you change to manual mode. it may indicate a fault.MANUALS.34 If this warning light lights up when driving. . undo the upper section of the gaiter 3.If a vehicle with an automatic gearbox breaks down.WS Stopping the vehicle When the vehicle is stationary. and permit engine braking in the event of long descents. Apply the handbrake. 2 3 Faults - Special circumstances . ...................................................................................................WWW.......................................02 Heating and air conditioning ................................................... Luggage compartment ................24 3.................................................. Transporting items in the luggage compartment .......WS 3...........................................37 3..39 3............................ Storage compartments / luggage compartment fittings ..........28 3..... 3...............................34 3...................................................................... Rear shelf ..........................................................................26 3................................... Sun visor ................................................................25 Interior lights .......................23 3...................................36 3............................................03 3................... 3.............................................................. 3..................................... Rear bench seat ................................................................................................... 3...............................................01 .................................................................................35 3................................................................................................ 3.................................................................................................................19 3............MANUALS............... WWW...................................23 3...............................MANUALS.................................................27 Storage compartments / passenger compartment fittings ............................................ 3......WS Section 3: Your comfort Air vents .................29 Ashtrays / cigarette lighters .............................................................................................................................. Sunroof ..33 3..............................................................38 3.......................................04 Electric windows .........................................................20 Windscreen ...... Right-hand side window demister 7 .Control panel 6 .Windscreen demisting vents 4 .Centre air vents 3.Right-hand side air vent 8 .Footwell heater outlets for front and rear passengers WWW.WS .MANUALS.WS 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 1 .02 5 .AIR VENTS (air outlets) 1 2 WWW.Left-hand air vent 2 .Left-hand side window demister 3 .MANUALS. MANUALS.WS 3 2 4 2 Air flow Move wheel 1 or 4 (beyond the point where a certain resistance is felt). WWW.03 . : maximum flow : closed Direction Right/left: move the tabs 2 or 3.WS 3.AIR VENTS 1 WWW. Up/down: lower or raise the tabs 2 or 3.MANUALS. HEATING / VENTILATION A B C WWW.WS D E F G Adjusting the air temperature Move control B.electric windscreen operating indicator light B .distribution of air in passenger compartment the G . Turning the knob to the right increases the temperature.MANUALS.adjustment of the amount of air delivered to the passenger compartment E .operation of the heated rear screen and the electric windscreen WWW.air recirculation operation F .WS 3.MANUALS. Controls A .air conditioning operation D .air temperature adjustment C .04 . HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) D WWW.MANUALS.WS Position The air flow is distributed between the air vents, the side window demisters, the windscreen demisters and the front and rear footwells. Position The air flow is distributed to all the air vents and the front and rear footwells. Position The air flow is only directed to all the air vents. Position The air flow is distributed between the demisting vents for the windscreen, the side windows and the front and rear footwells. Distribution of air in passenger compartment Move control D. Position the All the air flow is directed to the demisting vents for the windscreen and the side windows. WWW.MANUALS.WS 3.05 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) C WWW.MANUALS.WS F Adjusting the amount of air supplied to the passenger compartment Normal use Move control F (from 1 to 4). Passenger compartment ventilation is by blown air. The ventilation fan determines how much air enters and stabilises the temperature in the passenger compartment. Turning the knob to the right increases the air flow. Limited use Control F at position 0. In this position: - air conditioning stops automatically even if key C is activated; - the ventilation speed of air supplied to the passenger compartment is zero; - there is, however, a slight flow of air when the vehicle is moving. WWW.MANUALS.WS 3.06 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) A E WWW.MANUALS.WS Vehicle with electric heated windscreen Press successively on button E to select: - operation of rear screen demisting and de-icing and rear-view mirror de-icing: the indicator light on button E lights up: - operating of rear screen de-icing/ demisting, rear-view mirror de-icing and very rapid windscreen de-icing/demisting: the indicator light on button E and the indicator light A light up Rear screen and electric windscreen de-icing (depending on vehicle) Vehicle without electric heated windscreen - Press button E: the indicator light will light up. This function demists and de-ices the rear window and the electric de-icing rear view mirrors quickly. These functions are stopped: - automatically after a specified time; - by pressing button E again. There are two ways to switch this function off: - it stops automatically after a specified time; - by pressing button E again. WWW.MANUALS.WS 3.07 HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) B C WWW.MANUALS.WS F The use of the air conditioning system: - lowers the internal passenger compartment temperature; - eliminates condensation more quickly. Note: - you can change the air conditioning temperature at any time using control B. - the air conditioning may be used in all conditions, but does not operate when the external temperature is low. C2 C1 Air conditioning control Control C starts or stops the air conditioning system. Press successively on button C to select: - the economy air conditioning function. Indicator light C1 is lit up. The system determines the level of cooling necessary to limit fuel consumption; - the maximum air conditioning function. Indicator light C2 is lit up. There is maximum cooling; - switching the air conditioning off. There is no cold air when the control F is at position 0, even if button C is activated (the indicator light goes out). WWW.MANUALS.WS 3.08 Do not open the refrigerant circuit: the fluid is dangerous to the eyes and skin.WS Air conditioning control (continued) If no cool air is produced Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are in good condition. stop the air conditioning system (press button C until the indicator lights go out) and call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer.09 . WWW.HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) C WWW. If not.MANUALS.MANUALS.WS 3. with no air being taken from outside the vehicle.allows the desired temperature of the passenger compartment to be achieved as quickly as possible.MANUALS. Air recirculation mode operating time is limited by the system except when there are high external temperatures: control G indicator light goes out. .WS G Operating the air recirculation (isolating the passenger compartment) . In these conditions air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled. WWW.. by pressing button G. Prolonged use of the air recirculation mode may cause the windows to mist up or lead to odours.WS 3.Press control G: the operating indicator light will light up. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode (external air) as soon as you have passed through the polluted areas.MANUALS.isolated the external atmosphere (driving in polluted areas. Air recirculation: .10 ..HEATING / VENTILATION (continued) WWW.). as the air is not renewed. Automatic mode operation key 2 .indicator light not lit up.Air recirculation button and automatic recirculation operation 6 . 5. 3.11 . .WS Keys 1. the function is switched on.WS 4 5 9 .Air distribution button adjustment 5 .Rear screen de-icing button 11 . the function is switched off.Air conditioning key 11 10 9 8 7 6 Controls 1 .Left-hand temperature adjustment button 3 .indicator light lit up.Right-hand temperature adjustment button 7 .AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING 1 2 3 WWW.“See clear” key to demist and de-ice the windows 10 .Display 4 . 10 and 11 incorporate the indicator lights: .System switch off button 8 . 9.Ventilation speed adjustment button WWW. 6.MANUALS.MANUALS. to decrease button 2 or the temperature. turn 4 to the right. Ambient temperature (automatic mode) The automatic air conditioning system guarantees (with the exception of extreme cases) the ambient temperature in the passenger compartment and maintains a good level of visibility. The heating and ventilation system independently manages the left hand (adjustment key 2) and right hand (adjustment key 4) temperature. The temperature can be set between 16 and 26°C.12 .MANUALS.AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) 1 2 WWW. WWW. Operation of the automatic mode .MANUALS. turn 4 to the left. Special note On some vehicles the Renault Card stores the settings selected by the user: this includes the temperature adjustment settings. Press the Auto key 1 to switch on the automatic recirculation mode (indicator light 5b lights up).WS 4 5b .Press button 1: the indicator light will light up.to increase button 2 or . the temperature. It is therefore recommended that you keep the same Renault Card so that you can reuse your personal settings.WS 3. the system controls: . .the automatic operation of the rear screen de-icing/demisting and/or windscreen.AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Ambient temperature (automatic mode) (continued) WWW. When the vehicle is started in cold or hot weather. increasing or decreasing the values displayed does not mean that the temperature is reached more quickly (whatever the air temperature indicated.the ventilation speed. .starting or stopping the air conditioning.WS Operation To obtain and maintain the temperature selected and to maintain good visibility. WWW. .WS 3.13 . .the distribution of air. if fitted.the temperature of the air blown to the left or right. The values displayed are the air temperature setting. .MANUALS. except in particularly uncomfortable circumstances.MANUALS. Generally. the dashboard air vents may remain open whatever the climatic conditions may be.the air recirculation management. the system optimises the temperature increase or decrease). press key 10 again.AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) B A B 3 WWW.WS 3. the indicator light 10a lights up and the indicator lights A and B appear on the display 3.MANUALS.it stops automatically after a specified time.WS 10a 10 Rear screen de-icing/demisting Press key 10. . This function demists the rear window and the electric heated rear-view mirrors quickly.MANUALS. WWW.14 . To exit this function: . the front side windows. “See clear” function Press key 9. press key 8. There are two possibilities for quitting this function: .AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) 1 A B C B 3 WWW. B and C appear on display 3. WWW. the rear-view mirrors and the rear window.WS 5a 5b Special note For vehicles equipped with an electric heated windscreen. the indicator light lights up and indicator lights A. Note: If you want to alter the air flow (which may be noisy in the passenger compartment).WS 3.press key 9 again (the indicator light goes out).Press the Auto key 1 (indicator light lit up). The Auto key indicator light goes out: the air distribution is no longer in automatic operating mode. .MANUALS. this is operated when the See clear function is used. For efficiency. The best possible flow of air is then directed towards the windscreen and front window air outlets.MANUALS. this automatically switches on the air conditioning (indicator light 11a lit up) and switches off air recirculation (indicator lights 5a and 5b not lit up). 11a 9 8 This function quickly demists and de-ices the windscreen.15 . The arrows on indicator light D show the setting selected: . The automatic mode is switched off by pressing button 7 (indicator light 1a goes out). . Press button 1 to return to automatic mode.the arrow pointing downwards represents air flow to the footwells. but only the air distribution is no longer controlled automatically by the system.WS 3.AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) 1 D WWW.the arrow pointing upwards represents air flow from the windscreen demister vents.WS 1a 7 Personalised operation air distribution There are six air distribution settings which are obtained by pressing key 7.the horizontal arrow represents air flow to the dashboard air vents. The system normally operates in automatic mode but you can alter the standard settings used by the system (quantity of air.16 .MANUALS. . WWW. The indicator light on key 1 (automatic mode) will go out when manual air distribution is selected.). etc.MANUALS. WS 3. In automatic mode. The automatic mode is switched off by pressing button 11: the indicator light in button 1 will go out.AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Switching air conditioning on or off In automatic mode.17 . The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the top or bottom of key 8. This may take a few seconds or several minutes.MANUALS.MANUALS. The air conditioning is switched on (indicator light lit up) or off (indicator light not lit up) using key 11. Press button 1 to return to automatic mode. the system switches the air conditioning system on or off. the system uses the most suitable amount of air to reach and maintain the desired temperature. in cold weather. This key increases or decreases the amount of air blown into the passenger compartment. the ventilation will not start immediately at maximum power but will increase progressively until the engine temperature is warm enough to heat the passenger compartment air.WS 1 11 8 Varying the blower speed In automatic mode. WWW. (the AUTO key 1 indicator light goes out). WWW. depending on the external climatic conditions. Note: the “See clear” function automatically operates the air conditioning (indicator light lit up). .18 . Air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be isolated (driving in polluted areas). WWW.MANUALS. analyses the outside air quality. Stopping the system Press key 6. The system is switched off. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode (external air or automatic recirculation) as soon as you have passed through the polluted areas. WWW. and when necessary.WS 1 3 5b 5 5a 9 6 Automatic recirculation mode Indicator light 5a comes on. as the air is not renewed. with no air being taken from outside the vehicle.automatic recirculation (indicator light 5a lit up). Press key 1 or 9 to exit this mode. During recirculation. No more information appears on the display 3. Prolonged use of the air recirculation mode may cause the windows to mist up or lead to odours. air is taken from the passenger compartment and is recycled. automatically isolates the passenger compartment. This mode isolated the passenger compartment from the external atmosphere. The indicator light lights up.continuous recirculation (indicator light 5b lit up).WS 3. .AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING (continued) Air recirculation mode Press successively on button 5 to select: .MANUALS. by pressing button 5.external air. Vehicles fitted with an auxiliary heater Some vehicles are fitted with an auxiliary heater which enables the passenger compartment to be heated more quickly.MANUALS. When the device is functioning you can normally see a small amount of smoke on the right-hand side of the vehicle coming from the heater's exhaust system. you will normally note an increase in fuel consumption (especially when driving in an urban area). caused by condensation. WWW.WS 3. it is normal to note the presence of water underneath the vehicle. If no cool air is produced Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are in good condition. switch off the climate control and call for the assistance of a Renault Dealer. Fuel consumption When the air conditioning is operating. this may be caused by a clogged particle filter element. consult your Renault Dealer. Do not open the refrigerant fluid circuit. demisting or air conditioning has become less effective. This device only functions when the engine is running and in cold weather.MANUALS.Otherwise. in the event of a fault.19 . Generally.WS Faults If you notice that the de-icing.AIR CONDITIONING: MISCELLANEOUS WWW. After prolonged use of the air conditioning. From the driver’s seat Operate switch: .). From the front passenger's seat Operate switch 6 From the rear seats Operate switch 7 WWW. .2 for the front passenger's side.WS 6 7 1 5 2 3 4 With the ignition on: .MANUALS. hand.MANUALS.20 . arm. .ELECTRIC WINDOWS WWW. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck. Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended.1 for the driver’s side. etc.WS 3.release the switch to raise the window to the height desired.3 and 5 for the rear passengers. .press the switch to open the window to the desired height (note: the rear windows do not open fully). Child safety Switch 4 overrides the operation of the rear windows. . .the two front windows. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck.with the ignition on. it can be used for: . Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended. If fitted in the vehicle.). 3. The system operates: .WS 3.with the ignition off until the front doors are opened/closed (limited to approximately 20 minutes).21 .the driver's window. arm. 5.the four windows. Child safety Switch 4 overrides the operation of the rear windows. hand.MANUALS. etc. . Operate switches 1. 6 or 7.ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS WWW. 2. WWW.MANUALS.WS 6 7 1 5 2 3 4 The one-touch mode is an addition to the electric window operation described above. an animal's paw.Raise the switch concerned fully and quickly: the window will close completely. Faults If the window detects resistance when closing it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres.WS 3. WWW.Press the switch concerned halfway to open the window and release at the desired height.: a person's fingers.MANUALS. If the window detects resistance when closing (e. the windows will close automatically. Special note Normal mode .) it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres. Pressing the switch during this operation will stop the window moving. WWW. In case of a fault when closing a window the system changes to continuous mode: press the switch concerned as often as necessary to close the window. .MANUALS.g.Press the switch concerned fully and quickly: the window will open completely.Raise the switch concerned halfway to close the window and release at the desired height..ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS (continued) One-touch mode . If necessary. a the branch of a tree. consult your local Renault Dealer. . then hold the switch (still on the closure side) for a second to reinitialise the system..22 .WS Remote control window closing (if fitted) When you lock the doors from the exterior using the Renault Card and you press the locking button on the Renault Card for more than 2 seconds. WINDSCREEN Laminated side windows It is recommended that you replace damaged (cracked) windows: it may break if a passer-by or passenger hits the window. in particular. etc.). 1 Manually windows operated rear Operate window winder 1. car park season tickets.MANUALS.23 . located on either side of the rear view mirror. limits the infrared rays entering the passenger compartment.g. WWW.MANUAL WINDOWS WWW.MANUALS.WS Windscreen layers with reflective This windscreen reflects the sun and.WS 3.: motorway permits. There are two zones which allow passes to be affixed to the windscreen (e. MANUALS.WS 4 6 5 7 6 1 2 3 Front sun visor Lower the sun visor 1.WS 3. Rear sun blind Pull the sun blind using tab 7 until the two hooks 6 engage in the retainers (make sure the hooks are properly locked in position). The light comes on automatically.MANUALS. Illuminated courtesy mirror Lift cover 3. Non-illuminated courtesy mirror 2 Lift cover 3. WWW. Rear sun blind Pull to sun visor up using tab 5 until the hook 4 engages in the retainer (make sure the hooks are properly locked in position).24 .SUN VISOR 1 WWW. Closing: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position O.MANUALS.MANUALS. sunblind 1 is drawn back at the same time.Ensure the sunroof is properly closed before leaving your vehicle.Opening: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position D. To slide the sunroof With the ignition on: .Closing: bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position O then close the screen 1 again. arm.25 . F. E. etc. B or C until the required tilt angle is obtained. . in the window).WS O A 3 . G.WS 3. until the required opening is obtained.Do not open the sunroof immediately after the vehicle has been in the rain or after your car has been washed. WWW. or I. . H. .Clean the seal every three months using products selected by Renault's Technical Department.Opening: pull the sunblind 1 back and then bring the mark 3 on button 2 to position A. 1 2 B The sunroof must be completely closed before it is changed. To tilt the sunroof With the ignition on: . Child safety Never leave your vehicle without removing the Renault Card from the card reader and never leave a child (or animal) unattended. With the card in the reader it would be possible to operate the electric windows and there is a risk that the child may be seriously injured (by trapping his or her neck. hand.ELECTRIC SUNROOF WWW. . until the sunroof is fully closed. WWW.. set to O. WWW. The system operates: .ELECTRIC SUNROOF (continued) Remote control sunroof closing (for vehicles fitted with automatic remote control windows). When you lock the doors using the Renault Card and you press the locking button on the Renault Card for more than 2 seconds. an animal's paw..If the sunroof detects resistance when closing (e. the windows and sunroof will close automatically. press switch 2.with the ignition on. Special instructions . Consult your Renault Dealer.with the ignition off until the front doors are opened/closed (limited to approximately 20 minutes). Sunroof closing fault In the event of a fault.MANUALS.WS 3.: a person's fingers.g. the sunroof position selected before closing can be recalled by pressed button 2. a the branch of a tree. .WS O 2 .26 .MANUALS.) it stops and then opens again by approximately 5 centimetres.If the sunroof was closed using the Renault Card. intermittent lighting is obtained.INTERIOR LIGHTS WWW. Depending on the vehicle. WWW. . controlled by opening one of the doors.MANUALS. it is possible to adjust the intensity of lighting by turning wheel 4. Map reading lights In the front seats. press switch 1 for the driver and 3 for the passenger. It only goes out when the doors are correctly closed.continuous lighting is obtained. If a door is opened the timed light operation period will begin again.WS 3. Remote unlocking of the doors activates the courtesy and floor lights temporarily.or the light does not come on at all.27 . . press switch 5 or 7. The lights will then fade progressively.MANUALS. In the rear seats.WS B 3 7 1 2 4 A 5 6 Courtesy lights A or B When switch 2 or 6 is pressed: . WWW.MANUALS.WS 3. . . If a door is opened the timed light operation period will begin again.intermittent lighting is obtained. . The lights will then fade progressively.WS 8 C 10 9 Courtesy lights C When you slide switch 8 . Floor lights 9 These are located underneath the dashboard: one on the driver's side and one on the passenger's side. Door lights Each light 10 lights up when a door is opened. controlled by opening one of the doors.INTERIOR LIGHTS (continued) WWW.continuous lighting is obtained.28 Remote unlocking of the doors activates the courtesy and floor lights temporarily.or the light does not come on at all.MANUALS. It only goes out when the doors are correctly closed. STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS WWW. Note: depending on the vehicle. WWW.WS 3.WS 2 3 4 1 Driver's side glove box 1 Central storage compartment To open.MANUALS. (see the special notes for these fittings). Cup holder 3 Press rod 4 then release: the cup holder opens automatically. odysline.MANUALS. press rod 4. this compartment is designed to conceal the car radio. To store it.29 .. press the centre of the cover 2 then release: it opens automatically. the cup holder automatically closes. Carminat controls.. Raise or lower the blanking cover 6 to open or close the air inlet.MANUALS. a card. Inside the cover are places for a pen. cups.WS 3. Door storage compartments 8 Front door storage compartments 7 WWW. etc. this storage compartment is ventilated and air conditioned. Like the passenger compartment.30 .STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) WWW.MANUALS.WS 8 7 5 6 Passenger side storage compartment Pull handle 5 to open the storage compartment. thus obstructing its use.31 .MANUALS. lift the first small storage compartment to access the large storage compartment. Accessories socket 10 The interior accessories socket 10 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W (voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department.STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) WWW.WS 3. If fitted.MANUALS.WS 10 9 11 Front central arm rest storage compartments Lift cover 9. WWW. Front seat storage compartment pockets 11 No objects should be placed on the floor (area in front of driver) as such objects may slide under the pedal during braking manoeuvres. WS 3.32 .MANUALS.STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) WWW. Spectacles holder 14 WWW.WS 12 14 13 Front seat storage pockets 12 Accessories socket 13 The accessories socket 13 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W (voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department.MANUALS. WS 16 17 18 16 15 18 Rear armrest storage compartments Lower the armrest 15. WWW.MANUALS. lift the cover 16 using the unlocking handle 17. Complete the operation by pulling it.WS 3.STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / PASSENGER COMPARTMENT FITTINGS (continued) WWW.MANUALS. Cup holder Press bar 18 then release: the cup holder begins to open automatically.33 . replace it without pushing it all the way in.WS 1 2 3 Ashtray in front console To open. pull the cover beyond the locking point and the ashtray will be released from its housing. pull the handle 3 until it locks. Pull it out to use. lower cover 1. To empty the ashtray. Cigarette lighter With the ignition on.34 . It will spring back with a click when it is ready.ASHTRAYS / CIGARETTE LIGHTERS WWW. WWW. Ashtray in rear console To open. pull the cover towards you and the ashtray will be released from its housing.MANUALS. To empty the ashtray. press in the cigarette lighter 2. After use.MANUALS.WS 3. See the “Transporting objects in the luggage compartment” information in section 3. Press button 1 and lower the seatback. . Transporting objects If you have to place objects on the folded seatback. make sure these do not prevent the seatback latch from locking in.MANUALS. see information on rear head restraint in section 1.REAR BENCH SEAT 1 WWW.Make sure the seat belts are positioned correctly.WS 3. The seatback may be folded down to allow bulky objects to be carried. make sure it is locked in place correctly. WWW. . it is vital that you remove the head restraints before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat.Where seat covers are fitted.WS To fold down the seatback Lower the rear head restraint.Reposition the head restraints.MANUALS. . .35 .When refitting the seatback. .MANUALS. To open Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.WS 3. WWW. . it can be opened manually from inside.MANUALS.LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT WWW.WS 2 1 2 The tailgate is locked and unlocked at the same time as the doors. 3 3 Opening the doors from inside the car If it is not possible to unlock the luggage compartment.insert a pencil or similar object in the cavity 3 and slide the unit as shown in the drawing. To close Lower the tailgate using handle 2 inside the tailgate to help you.push the luggage compartment lid to open it. .access the luggage compartment by tilting the seatback(s) on the rear bench seat.36 . Lift the rear parcel shelf slightly and pull it towards you. especially heavy or hard objects.MANUALS. WWW.37 . Proceed in reverse order to refit the shelf. on the parcel shelf.WS 1 Rear parcel shelf To remove. Do not place any objects.WS 3.MANUALS.REAR PARCEL SHELF WWW. These may pose a risk to the vehicle occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident. unhook the two straps 1 from the tailgate. STORAGE COMPARTMENTS / LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS WWW. An accessory storage space 2 can be used for a tool kit. WWW.WS 3 1 2 4 4 4 4 Accessories socket The accessories socket 1 is provided for accessories with maximum power of 180 W (voltage 12V) which have been approved by Renault's Technical Department.MANUALS. etc. for example.WS 3.MANUALS. Fittings in compartment the luggage Lashing rings 4 These are for securing items transported in the luggage compartment (see information on transporting objects in the luggage compartment). Accessory storage space 3 can be used for an oil can.38 . warning triangle. MANUALS.WS 3. B Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor.The rear seatback for normal loads (example A). Use the lashing rings located on the luggage compartment floor.The folded down seat for maximum loads (example B). Fasten the rear seat belts. If you have to place objects on the folded seatback.TRANSPORTING ITEMS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT Always position the objects transported so that the largest surface is against: WWW. . WWW.WS A Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor.MANUALS.39 . . The luggage should be loaded in such a way that no item will be thrown forward and strike the occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly. even if the seats are not occupied. it is vital that you remove the head restraints before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as possible against the seat. WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.40 .WS 3.MANUALS. MANUALS.WS 4. (Very severe damage is likely to be caused to the engine if it runs out of coolant. Frequency of oil change Refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle. Engine coolant level The level when cold should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion bottle 1. .WS 1 Frequency for checking coolant level Check the coolant level regularly.anti-freeze protection. .LEVELS WWW. Danger of burns. only use products approved by Renault's Technical Department: .anti-corrosion protection of the cooling system.MANUALS.09 Consult your Renault Dealer at once if you notice an abnormal or repeated drop in any of the fluid levels. Top this level up when cold before it reaches the MIN mark.) If topping up is required. WWW. No operations may be carried out on the cooling circuit when the engine is hot. MANUALS. .WS 4. For topping up or refilling with oil.MANUALS.10 Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. use products approved by Renault's Technical Department.WS 1 Power assisted steering pump 1 Frequency of changing Refer to the servicing booklet for your vehicle. Refer to the information on engine compartment cover panels in section 4 for more details. When the engine is cold the level should be visible between the Min and Max levels on the reservoir 1.LEVELS (continued) WWW. Level Remove the engine compartment cover panels. WWW. WS Filling After any operation on the hydraulic circuit.LEVELS (continued) WWW. especially if you notice even the slightest loss in braking efficiency.MANUALS. Only use fluids approved by Renault's Technical Department (and taken from a sealed container). 1 Brake fluid level This should be checked frequently. but it should never be allowed to fall below the MINIMUM warning mark. Level 1 The level falls naturally as the brake pads wear. a specialist must replace the brake fluid.WS 4. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment.MANUALS. WWW. Frequency of changing Refer to the Servicing booklet for your vehicle.11 . Jets Use a flat screwdriver to position the windscreen washer jets. FILTERS BATTERY 2 1 Windscreen / headlight washer reservoir Topping up Through cap 1. red-hot objects and sparks away from the battery as there is a risk of explosion. Never open cover 2. diesel filter. If it should. etc. Take care when moving the battery since it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin.12 . WWW. Liquid Water + special windscreen washer fluid (anti-freeze product in winter) approved by RENAULT’s Technical Department.WS The replacement of filter elements (air filter. The battery does not require servicing. wash the affected area with plenty of cold water. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment.MANUALS.LEVELS (continued) WWW. Keep all flames.WS 4. Frequency for replacing filter components: see the Servicing booklet for your vehicle.) is anticipated in the maintenance operations for your vehicle. passenger compartment filter.MANUALS. bumpers) using pressure cleaning apparatus or by spraying on products not approved by Renault's Technical Department. WWW. • Allow rust to form following minor impacts.WS 4. • Scrape off mud or dirt without pre-wetting. parts with hinges (e.BODYWORK MAINTENANCE Protection against the action of corrosive agents Although your vehicle has been treated with very effective anti-corrosion products. inside the fuel tank flap) and painted plastic external fittings (e. .Atmospheric pollution (built-up and industrial areas). underneath the bodywork. particularly in hot weather).MANUALS. engine compartment).13 . • Drive frequently in snow or muddy conditions without periodically washing the car.g. it nevertheless remains subject to the action of: • Corrosives in the atmosphere . WWW.Saline atmosphere (near the sea. mud.WS What you should not do • Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or freezing temperatures.g.g. particularly under the wheel arches and body.MANUALS. • Use solvents not approved by Renault's Technical Department to remove spots as this could damage the paintwork. If adequate precautions are not taken. road grit thrown up by other vehicles. this could give rise to corrosion or incorrect operation. • Abrasives Wind-carried dust and sand.Seasonal and humid climatic conditions. • Allow external accumulate. especially road salt in winter. dirt to • Degrease or clean mechanical components (e. . • Minor impacts A minimum amount of protection is necessary to guard your vehicle against such risks so as not to lose the benefit of these developments. their protection must be reapplied by spraying on products approved by Renault's Technical Department. • If your vehicle is protected by the Renault anti-corrosion warranty. remember to visit the body shop periodically.MANUALS. .MANUALS.14 We have selected special products to care for your vehicle and you can obtain these from Renault accessory outlets.WS • Keep well away from the vehicle in front when driving on freshly laid surfaces to prevent paint damage. Consult the anti-corrosion booklet.BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (continued) What you should do • Wash your vehicle frequently. WWW. . WWW. . or have repaired quickly patches where the paint has been damaged to prevent corrosion spreading. check the mounting of exterior equipment.Spots of tree resin and industrial grime. • Respect local regulations about washing vehicles (e. • Repair.Bird droppings that contain chemicals which rapidly discolour paintwork and may even cause the paint to peel off: the vehicle must be washed immediately to remove these marks since it is impossible to remove them by polishing. .WS 4. do not wash your vehicle on a public highway). If your vehicle has a car phone. additional headlights and rear-view mirrors and secure the wiper blades and radio aerial with adhesive tape. • If mechanical components have to be cleaned.Salt deposited in the wheel arches and underneath the body after driving in areas where the roads are chemically treated.Mud in the wheel arches and under the body which forms damp patches. • Before using a revolving brush type car wash. preferably using our recommended cleaning products and use a high-pressure jet to rinse off the underside of the vehicle and the wheel arches in particular to get rid of: . remove the aerial.g. Cleaning products containing alcohol may not be used under any circumstances. Finally. • washing up liquid (with one part washing up liquid to 200 parts water). exterior temperature.MANUALS.MANUALS. If this does not clean them properly. use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth. Rinse off with a soft. clock. Do not use cleaning agents or dyes. What you should not do It is strongly recommended that you do not use high pressure cleaning apparatus or sprays inside the passenger compartment: if the necessary precautions are not taken. Use products selected by Renault's Technical Department (or Renault accessory outlets) or warm soapy water using a sponge and dry off with a dry cloth. damp cloth. instrument panel.15 .).WS • Seat belts These must be kept clean. etc. Special instructions • Instrument panel window displays (e. Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).WS 4. this could impair the correct functioning of electric or electronic components in the vehicle or have other detrimental effects. WWW.g. WWW.INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE What you need to do Whatever type of stain is on the trim. radio. use soapy water (warm if necessary ) based on: • natural soap. WS WWW.MANUALS.16 .WWW.WS 4.MANUALS. .......................................................................................................29 Wipers (replacing the blades) ......WS Section 5: Practical advice Emergency spare wheel . 5..... Fitting a radio/accessories ...........................35 WWW..................................................... 5...................08 5.............................16 5...................................32 Faults .......................................................................16 5.............................02 5.............................................. 5...............................................................03 5.................... wheels...............................22 Battery .............................................................30 5.......................................................................24 5................................................................... 5........17 Fuses .......................................... winter use) .... Tyres (tyre safety....................... Interior lights (replacing bulbs) ............09 Rear lights (replacing bulbs) .................................................................................................06 Headlights (replacing bulbs) ...........MANUALS.......................13 5......................................................................... Towing ........................................................31 5..01 ............ 5..............41 5..........14 Side repeaters (replacing bulbs) ..................................WS 5................. Hubcaps .............................................................................34 5...... Tool kit (jack ................................................................................................ Changing a wheel .................................................................................................................. 5...........................................................................................28 5...............................................05 5..............25 Renault Card: battery ............................................WWW....................27 5............. 5..........MANUALS................................................................................... 5..........................................................................................04 5........................wheelbrace) ................................................................ 5.............21 5.................................................................................................................. MANUALS. If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years. driving speed should not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h). Emergency spare wheel 4 This is located in the luggage compartment.MANUALS.EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL WWW.WS 2 Using the spare wheel The tyre pressure monitor function does not monitor the emergency spare wheel (the wheel replaced by the emergency spare wheel disappears from the display and/or the information display). 1 3 4 Note: The aluminium rim wheel bolts can be used on an emergency spare wheel with steel rims. . remove the tool kit.open the luggage compartment lid.02 . . Vehicle fitted with an emergency spare wheel which is smaller than the other four wheels. remove the emergency spare wheel. WWW. remove the jack.Lift the flap using handle 1.unclip and open the retainer 3. When using the emergency spare wheel. . Refer to the Tyre pressure monitor information in Section 2.Hold the flap open using the hook 2 situated under the rear parcel shelf. To access the emergency spare wheel: . have it checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use. unscrew the central mounting.WS 5. on top of the emergency spare wheel.WS 2 4 Wheel spanner 3 This is used to tighten or release the wheel bolts. When refitting the jack. A 3 Towing ring 6 Refer to the information on towing in section 5. fold it completely and replace it in its location.03 The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only.MANUALS. 5 6 The tool kit A is located in the luggage compartment. To access the tools.WS 5. Storage compartments Storage compartments are provided in the tool kit for a fuse box and an immobiliser bolt. unclip and lift the retaining part 1. WWW. Hubcap spanner 4 or 5 It is used to remove the hubcaps. . Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs or to gain access under the vehicle.TOOL KIT 1 WWW.MANUALS. Jack 2 Release the jack 2. Central hubcap hubcap 4) (example: Central wheel (example: hubcap 5) hubcap Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner (located in the tool kit). followed by B and C. To refit the hubcap. WWW.HUBCAPS .WS 5. align it with the valve 2. Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner 7 (located in the tool kit) by inserting the spanner 7 into the recess 6.MANUALS.WHEELS WWW. To refit the hubcap align it with the recess 6 and tighten it with the spanner 7. When refitting the hubcap. finishing at the side opposite the valve D. position it so that the rim is aligned with the hubcap recess.04 . Push the retaining hooks in. We would advise you to note the number engraved on the spanner so that you can replace it if it is lost.MANUALS.WS 5 C 4 6 7 D 1 B 2 3 A Hubcap (example: hubcap 1) Remove the hubcap using the hubcap spanner 3 (located in the tool kit) by engaging the hook into one of the openings around the edge of the hubcap. starting with valve side A. • Tighten the bolts fully when the wheel is on the ground.MANUALS. • Loosen the wheel bolts using the wheelbrace 1. • Offer up the jack horizontally. Use a piece of wood under the base plate if on soft ground. remove the hubcap. 5. placing a plank under the jack). • Take off the wheel. 1 Park your vehicle on firm. • Remove the bolts. • Tighten the bolts and lower the jack. or P for automatic gearboxes).MANUALS. A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected (and repaired if possible) by a specialist. flat ground (if necessary.WS If you have a puncture.05 . • Position the emergency spare wheel on the central hub and turn it to locate the mounting holes in the wheel and the hub. the jack head must be positioned at the height of the supporting metal 2 provided in the lower section of the bodywork closest to the wheel concerned. replace the wheel as soon as possible. Fit it so that you press downwards rather than pulling upwards. Switch on the hazard warning lights.CHANGING A WHEEL WWW. Apply the handbrake and engage a gear (first or reverse. • If necessary. Ask all the passengers to leave the car and keep away from the traffic. WWW.WS 2 • Screw up the jack by hand at first to align the base plate (which should be inclined further inwards than the jack head). • Turn a few times to lift the wheel off the ground. WS 1 2 The tyres are the only contact between the vehicle and the road. When they need to be replaced. such as striking the kerb.road wheels WWW. Maintaining the tyres The tyres must be in good condition and the tread form must have sufficient depth. You must make sure that your tyres conform to local road regulations. When the tread has worn down to the level of these risers. Tyres fitted to the vehicle should either be identical to those fitted originally or conform to those recommended by your Renault Dealer.06 . dimension. only tyres of the same make. WWW. so it is essential to keep them in good condition. may damage the tyres and could lead to misalignment of the front axle geometry. An overloaded car.MANUALS. they become visible 2: the tyres concerned must be replaced now as only 1. particularly in very hot weather. type and profile should be used.6 mm maximum of tread remains and this is not sufficient to maintain good grip on wet roads.WS 5. tyres approved by Renault's Technical Department have wear warning strips 1 which are risers moulded into the tread at several points. Faults which occur when driving. or continual driving on poorly surfaced minor roads will lead to more rapid tyre wear and affect safety.TYRES Tyre safety . long journeys by motorway.MANUALS. WS Pressures should be checked when the tyres are cold. . . . (Refer to the section on Tyre pressures. There is a risk of false information leading to serious consequences. WWW. Note: a label (depending on country or version) affixed to the edge or frame of the driver's door gives the recommended tyre pressures.07 . Tyre pressures must be adhered to. Fitting new tyres For safety reasons. (Refer to the section on tyre pressures. Tyre pressures depend on the load and the driving speed.3 bar (3 PSI).MANUALS.It may affect the use of chains.WS 5. Never deflate a hot tyre. .) Tyre pressures must be checked at least once a month and always before a long journey. factors which may seriously affect safety and lead to: . (Remember to check the spare wheel at the same time.MANUALS. Fitting different tyres may change your vehicle as follows: .) Incorrect tyre pressures lead to abnormal tyre wear and unusually hot running.It may cause tyre noise.It may change the way it handles when cornering.the risk of blow-outs or of throwing a tread at high speed. ignore higher pressures which may be reached in hot weather or after driving at high speeds. Spare wheel Refer to the information on the spare wheel and instructions on how to change a wheel in section 5.It may mean that your vehicle no longer conforms to current regulations. assume an increase of 0.) Changing wheels around Each of the sensors integrated in the valves is devoted to one single wheel: under no circumstances should you swap the wheels.It may cause the steering to be heavy.TYRES (continued) Tyre pressures WWW.poor roadholding . If tyre pressures cannot be checked when the tyres are cold.2 to 0. this operation must only be carried out by a specialist. Adjust the pressures according to the conditions of use. . . It is necessary to keep to the speed specified by current legislation. • Studded tyres This type of equipment may only be used for a limited period and as laid down by local legislation.WS 5.WS • “Snow” or winter tyres We would recommend that these be fitted to all four wheels to ensure that your vehicle retains maximum road holding. these tyres may be fitted to the two front axle wheels. Consult you Renault Dealer. Chains may only be fitted to tyres of the same size as those originally fitted to your vehicle. we would recommend that you consult your Renault Dealer who will be able to advise you on the choice of equipment which is most suitable for your vehicle.MANUALS. • Chains For safety reasons. Special features for models fitted with 17” wheels If you wish to use chains.A specific direction of rotation. Note: We would point out that these tyres may sometimes have: . Chains must not be fitted to tyres which are larger than those originally fitted to the vehicle. As a minimum.MANUALS. WWW.A maximum speed which may be lower than the maximum speed of your vehicle. fitting chains to the rear axle is absolutely forbidden. you must use special equipment.08 In all cases.TYRES (continued) Use in winter WWW. C.MANUALS.Remove the neck 3 from the windscreen washer reservoir.HEADLIGHTS: ACCESS WWW.MANUALS. Accessing headlight the left-hand Cover panel C Press the tab 2 to release the cover panel and remove it. Slide it to the left and remove it. E) Accessing headlight the right-hand Vehicle with cover panel E . . D.WS C E 3 D 2 C B A 2 1 To access the headlights. first remove the various items of engine compartment cover panel (A. B.Remove the neck 3 from the windscreen washer reservoir.09 .disengage the cover panel A by gently lifting it and pulling it to the right.disengage the cover panel D by gently lifting it and pulling it to the right. .WS 5. . WWW. Take care when working under the bonnet as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment. Vehicle with cover panel B .Unclip the central cover panel B by pressing button 1. HEADLIGHTS: replacing bulbs WWW.WS 5. carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth.V. Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used under any circumstances.MANUALS. Halogen-type bulb: 1 3 anti UV (see box). Do not touch the glass of the halogen bulb.10 . please refit the cover.) It is advisable to carry a set of spare bulbs for emergencies. Hold it by its base. WWW. use a soft cloth or cotton wool to clean them. H1 H7 Front side lights Remove the bulb holder 5 to access the bulb. As the headlights have plastic lenses. (If any other type of bulb is used. 55 W bulbs. Bulb type: orange PY21 W bayonet bulb. Bulb type: W5W. use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. the headlight may be damaged.WS 2 1 3 4 Cleaning headlights As the headlights are made of plastic “glass”. Direction indicator lights Turn the bulb holder 6 by a quarter turn and remove the bulb. When the bulb has been changed. Release the spring 2 or 4 and remove the bulb. Finally. you must use anti-U. If this does not clean them properly. A B 6 5 Main beam / dipped headlights Remove the cover A or B by turning it a quarter of a turn.MANUALS. Remove the connector from the bulb. MANUALS.) It is advisable to carry a set of spare bulbs for emergencies. Hold it by its base. Release spring 2 and take out the bulb. As the headlights have plastic lenses. Bulb type: D2R.WS 5. A special mounting is required to fit this type of headlight. (If any other type of bulb is used. A 1 B 3 Type of halogen bulb: H1 anti UV (see box).WS 2 Headlight main beam Remove the cover B turning it by a quarter turn. you must use anti-U. 55 W bulbs. the headlight may be damaged.11 . Remove the connector 3 and remove the bulb. WWW. When the bulb has been changed. Do not touch the glass of the halogen bulb. please refit the cover B Dipped beam headlights with Xenon bulbs They are marked by a label 1 on the lens unit A This type of headlight bulb must be changed by a RENAULT Dealer.V. It is not permitted to fit a headlight fitted with Xenon bulbs to a version which was not designed to receive the unit.HEADLIGHTS WITH XENON BULBS: replacing bulbs WWW.MANUALS. WS 5.12 . carefully dry off with a soft dry cloth. 4 A 5 Finally. use a soft cloth or cotton wool slightly moistened with soapy water and then wipe clean with a soft damp cloth. use a soft cloth or cotton wool to clean them.HEADLIGHTS WITH XENON BULBS: replacing bulbs (continued) WWW.WS Cleaning headlights As the headlights are made of plastic “glass”. Front side lights Remove the cover A by turning it a quarter of a turn. Bulb type: W5W. Bulb type: orange PY21 W bayonet bulb.MANUALS. Direction indicators Turn the bulb holder 4 a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used under any circumstances.MANUALS. Remove the bulb holder 5 to access the bulb. WWW. If this does not clean them properly. your Dealer has available all the parts required for fitting these units. WWW.WS 5. consult a Renault Dealer.WS Additional lights If you wish to fit fog lights or long range driving lights to your vehicle. components and in particular the alternator). 1 Front fog lights 1 Changing a bulb and adjusting the headlight beam: Consult your Renault Dealer.MANUALS.MANUALS. Bulb type: H11.HEADLIGHTS: fog lights / additional WWW. Any operation on (or modification to) the electrical system must be performed by a Renault Dealer since an incorrect connection might damage the electrical installation (harness.13 . In addition. Unclip the bulb holder 2 to access the bulbs.MANUALS. release the rear light. 3 Direction indicator light Orange PY21 W bayonet bulb. WWW. From the exterior.WS 2 3 4 1 Indicators/brake and side lights Remove screw 1 in the luggage compartment.WS 5.REAR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs WWW.14 . 4 Side and brake lights Two filament bayonet bulb: P21/5 W.MANUALS. Unscrew the retaining bolt.REAR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) WWW. release the rear light. unclip the cover 5 from the light unit concerned to access the retaining bolt.MANUALS.WS 6 5 8 9 7 5 Rear fog light/reversing light and side lights On the tailgate. 8 Side lights Two filament bayonet bulbs P21/5 W. Unclip the bulb holder 6 to access the bulbs. 9 Fog light Bayonet bulb P21 W. From the exterior.15 .WS 5. 7 Reversing lights Bayonet bulb P21 W. WWW.MANUALS. MANUALS.16 . Remove the light cover to gain access to the bulb.REAR LIGHTS (continued) AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing bulbs WWW. WWW. Bulb type: W16W.WS 5. Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Number plate lights 11 Unclip the light 11 by pressing tab 12. Bulb type: festoon C5W.MANUALS.WS 10 11 13 12 Third brake light 10 Consult your Renault Dealer. Bulb type: W5W. Side mounted indicators 13 Unclip side mounted indicator 13 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver). MANUALS.WS 5.WS 1 A 2 3 2 Courtesy light A Unclip cover 1 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb concerned. Bulb type 2: W5W. Bulb type 3: C7W.17 .INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs WWW.MANUALS. WWW. Bulb type 5: W5W. Bulb type 6: C7W.MANUALS.18 .INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) B WWW.MANUALS.WS 5.WS 5 6 5 4 Courtesy light B Unclip cover 4 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb concerned. WWW. Bulb type 8: C7W.MANUALS.19 .WS 7 C 8 Courtesy light C Unclip cover 7 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver) Release the bulb.INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) WWW. WWW.WS 5.MANUALS. Bulb type: W5W. Front floor lights These are located in the lower section behind the dashboard. WWW.20 . Remove the bulb holder 11 from its mounting and take out the bulb. Rear floor lights These are located underneath the front seats. Bulb type: festoon C5W. Turn the bulb holder 10 through 90° and remove the bulb.MANUALS.INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) WWW.WS 11 9 10 Luggage compartment light Unclip the light by pressing tab 9 (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver).WS 5. Disconnect the light.MANUALS. Bulb type: W5W. WS 5. Press tab 14 to release the bulb holder and gain access to the bulb 15. Bulb type: festoon C5W.MANUALS.INTERIOR LIGHTS: replacing bulbs (continued) WWW.WS 13 14 15 12 Door lights Unclip the light 12 (using a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver). Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and take out the bulb. Disconnect the light.21 . Bulb type: W5W.MANUALS. WWW. Luggage compartment light Unclip the light 13 by pressing the tabs on each side (using a tool such as a flat screwdriver). check first of all that the fuses are sound. Fuse box 1 If a fault occurs in an electrical component. WWW.WS 5.MANUALS.MANUALS. To identify the fuses. Note: Close the cover again 4 before closing the vehicle door. To remove the fuse from the tweezers. . If a fuse is fitted where the rating is too high. Check the fuse in question and replace it if necessary by a fuse of the same rating. slide the fuse to the side.FUSES WWW.22 A sensible precaution: Obtain a box of spare bulbs and fuses from your RENAULT Dealer.WS 1 2 CORRECT INCORRECT 4 3 2 Use tweezers to remove the fuse 2. It is advisable not to use the free fuse locations. refer to label 3 (shown on the page opposite). Open cover 4. it may cause the electrical circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the event of an item of equipment using an excessive amount of current. WS Allocation Hazard warning lights/Flashers Symbol Allocation Right-hand dipped headlight Communication system/Radio Left-hand side light/ Lighting Electronic management unit/engine immobiliser Voice synthesiser/ Instrument panel/ Xenon headlight remote adjustment Front fog light/Instrument panel/Voice synthesiser Wipers Air conditioning/ Parking aid/ Reversing light Airbags/Pretensioners Locking/unlocking the doors Anti-lock braking (ABS) Passenger compartment accessories socket/ Car phone Interior lighting Horn Brake light/Wipers Electric windows.MANUALS.MANUALS.FUSES (continued) Symbol Allocation Headlight main beam Allocation of fuses (depending on the vehicle equipment level) Symbol WWW.WS De-icing door mirrors . Cigarette lighter/ Luggage compartment accessories socket Left-hand dipped beam headlight Rear fog light Rear screen demisting/ Steering column lock/ Front seats 5.23 Right-hand side light WWW. the clock. if it is not possible to stop the engine using the Renault Card. To do this.WS 5. you can use fuse 1 as an “emergency engine stop” function. etc.MANUALS. one touch electric windows. Refer to the information concerned in the notes describing these devices. WWW.ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES WWW. The fuses located in the engine compartment must not be handled. It will therefore be necessary to reprogram them.MANUALS.24 . lift cover A. As an exception.WS 1 A Note: This will cause the memory for some devices to be lost. remove the projecting fuse 1 from its retainer. such as remote control window closing. Wait a few for approximately 5 seconds then refit the fuse. red-hot objects and sparks away from the battery as there is a risk of explosion. .MANUALS.Do not place metal objects on the battery to avoid creating a short circuit between the terminals.WS 5. wash the affected area with plenty of cold water.WS . If it should. stop the charger before connecting or disconnecting the battery. .Ensure that all consumers are disconnected before disconnecting or reconnecting the battery.25 .BATTERY: breakdown To avoid all risk of sparks: WWW.When charging. Take care when working in the engine compartment as the engine cooling fan may cut in at any moment without warning. Keep all flames. WWW.MANUALS. Handle the battery with care as it contains sulphuric acid which must not come into contact with the eyes or skin. Consult your Renault Dealer. The battery must be kept clean and dry.MANUALS. Have the battery's charge status checked regularly: • especially if you use your vehicle for short journeys or for frequent driving in town. disconnect the battery or have it recharged regularly. • Finally.. Specific procedures may be required to charge some batteries.MANUALS. Consult your Renault Dealer.WS 5. protected from frost. WWW. Risk of serious injury. in particular during cold weather. If your vehicle is to be left stationary for a relatively long time. you should understand that the charge decreases naturally as a result of certain “permanent consumers” such as: the clock. When a large number of accessories are fitted to the vehicle. the charge declines.BATTERY: breakdown (continued) Connecting a battery charger Both battery leads must be disconnected (engine switched off). The battery must be stored in a cool dry place. WWW. have them connected to + after ignition. In this case. radio and trip computer will then have to be reprogrammed. after sales accessories. it is advisable to have your vehicle fitted with a battery which has an increased nominal capacity. Avoid all risk of sparks which may cause an immediate explosion and charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. The equipment with a memory.26 . Only a well-charged and well-maintained battery will have a long and useful life and enable you to start the car’s engine normally.WS • When the external temperature drops (in winter). only use those electrical components which are really necessary. In winter.. Do not disconnect the battery when the engine is running. Follow the instructions for use given by the manufacturer of the battery charger you are using. BATTERY: breakdown (continued) Starting the vehicle using the battery from another vehicle Proceed as follows when starting your vehicle from another vehicle's battery: Obtain suitable jump leads (with a large cross section) from a Renault Dealer or.MANUALS. An iced-up battery must be thawed out before current is supplied to it.WS 1 4 B Check that there is no contact between cables A and B and that cable A (+) is not touching any metal parts on the vehicle supplying the current.WS 5. Secure the negative cable (–) B to the (–) terminal 3 of the battery supplying the current and then to the (–) terminal 4 of the discharged battery.MANUALS. ensure that they are in perfect condition. A 3 2 Secure the positive cable (+) A to the (+) terminal 1 of the discharged battery. if you already have jump leads. Ah) which is at least the same as that of the discharged battery.27 . The two batteries must have an identical nominal voltage: 12 volts. WWW. Ensure that there is no risk of contact between the two vehicles (risk of short circuiting when the positive terminals are connected) and that the discharged battery is properly connected. Switch off your vehicle ignition. Start the engine as you would normally. then to the (+) terminal 2 of the battery supplying the current. Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and run it at an average speed. The battery supplying the current should have a capacity (amp-hours. WWW. As soon as it starts. disconnect cables A and B in reverse order (4-3-2-1). These batteries should last about two years.WS 1 3 2 Replacing the battery Pull firmly on the emergency key 1. The batteries can be obtained from your RENAULT Dealer. .RENAULT CARD: BATTERY 18249. Replace battery 2 in accordance with the polarity denoted on the emergency key (check that warning light 3 lights up properly by pressing a button on the RENAULT card).28 Do not dump your used batteries in the countryside. WWW. give them to an organisation responsible for collecting and recycling batteries.MANUALS.2 K LOC+ O T AU WWW.WS 5.MANUALS. WS 3 4 2 1 Fitting a radio Open the cover 1.FITTING A RADIO WWW. Unclip the cover 2. • In all cases. Consult your Renault Dealer to find out the correct reference number. + and – supply. it may result in damage being caused to the electrical installation and/or the units connected to it.MANUALS. except by Renault engineers: if the system is connected incorrectly. • No work may be carried out on the electric circuit of the vehicle.29 . • The specifications of the brackets and wires (available as a Renault parts accessory) vary depending on the equipment level of your vehicle and the type of radio. Tweeter speakers Unclip grille 3 using a tool such as a screwdriver to gain access to the speaker wires. WWW. Door speakers Unclip grille 4 using a tool such as a screwdriver to gain access to the speaker wires. speaker wires. The connections are found behind the cover: aerial. follow the manufacturer's fitting instructions carefully.WS 5.MANUALS. • If the car is fitted with any after-sales electrical equipment.30 . Ask for information on the rating and position of this fuse.* WWW. it may result in damage being caused to the electrical installation and/or the units connected to it.WS 5. Electrical or electronic accessories • Any work on the electrical systems on the car must be carried out by RENAULT network engineers: if the system is connected incorrectly.MANUALS. and to avoid any risk to your safety. we recommend that you use RENAULT approved accessories because they are suitable for your car and are the only accessories for which RENAULT will provide a warranty. Furthermore. Mobile phones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the original electronic systems fitted to the vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial.MANUALS. we remind you of the need to conform to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment. make sure that the unit is correctly protected by a fuse.WS Fitting after-sales accessories To ensure the correct operation of your car.ACCESSORIES Using mobile phones and CB equipment. WWW. Fully extend the wiper arm 6 ( the arm can not be completely removed).WS 5.MANUALS. . 6 B A Replacing windscreen wiper blades 1 . Rear window wiper 5 .Move the blade 5 until you meet some resistance. Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position.Move the blade into a horizontal position. To refit To refit the wiper blade. Change the wiper blades as soon as they become less efficient (approximately once a year). .Remove the blade by pulling on it.WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES WWW. WWW. proceed in reverse order to removal. . 5 2 4 3 The windscreen washer jets These can be adjusted using a tool such as a flat screwdriver.Press tab 2 and slide the wiper blade downwards until hook 4 on the wiper arm is released.Move the blade (movement A) and then refit it (movement B). . • Keep an eye on the condition of the blades. • In frosty weather.MANUALS. proceed in reverse order to removal.Lift the windscreen wiper arm 3 until it stops against the bonnet (the arm cannot be lifted completely).31 . . make sure that the wiper blades are not stuck by ice (risk of motor overheating). Make sure that the blade is correctly locked in position.WS To refit 1 To refit the wiper blade. Do not exceed the towing weight for your vehicle. Consult your Renault Dealer.MANUALS. never for lifting it either directly or indirectly. indicators..).32 .TOWING: breakdown WWW. 1 2 4 3 Insert the Renault Card in the card reader completely to unlock the steering wheel and to use the indicator lights (stop lights. The towed vehicle's lights must be switched on at night. 5 3 Only use the front 1 and rear 4 towing points (never use the driveshafts)..WS 5. WWW. It is also important to observe the towing conditions defined by the legislation for the particular country you are in.WS Access to towing points Unclip cover 2 or 5 First screw in the towing ring 3 by hand as far as it will go.MANUALS. Then finish tightening it using the wheelbrace from the tool kit. These towing points may only be used for pulling the vehicle. undo the upper section of the gaiter 3.Renault specifies the use of a rigid towing bar.WS Towing a vehicle with automatic transmission: special information Engine switched off: The transmission is no longer lubricated. do not exceed 15 mph (25 km/h). In exceptional cases.WS 5. you can tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground for a maximum distance of 30 miles (50 km). If the lever 1 becomes jammed in the P position.When towing a vehicle.A vehicle must not be towed if it is not fit to be driven. as this may result in damage being caused to the vehicle. To do this.TOWING: breakdown (continued) .MANUALS.Do not accelerate or brake suddenly when towing. even though you are pressing down the brake pedal. WWW.MANUALS. . Press the button located underneath the gaiter and at the same time press the unlocking button 2 to move the lever from position P. 1 2 3 The selector lever must be in neutral (position N). . It is preferable to tow this type of vehicle on a trailer or tow it with the front wheels off the ground. the vehicle being towed must be able to brake.33 . . If a rope or cable is used (where the law allows this). WWW. the lever can be released manually. WS A Permissible nose weight when towing a trailer.34 WWW. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for information on how to fit and operate the towing attachment. max. braked and unbraked: Refer to the information on “Weights” in section 6.WS A: 917 mm .TOWING (attachments) WWW. Note: Please keep these instructions with the rest of the vehicle documentation. towing weight.MANUALS.MANUALS. 5. albeit temporarily. Battery terminals not tight. • Warning light bulbs go dim and starter turns very slowly. Consult a Renault Dealer. Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is locked.MANUALS.WS CAUSES Battery lead disconnected terminals oxidised. Poor compression. Connect another battery to the faulty battery. WWW. The following hints will enable you to get going again quickly. Poor ignition. REMEDIAL ACTION Check battery terminals: scrape clean if oxidised and re-tighten. 5.WS . Change battery. For reasons of safety you should always consult a Renault Dealer as soon as you can. the warning lights fail to light up and the starter does not turn.MANUALS. of Dry spark plug leads and ignition coil. Check battery terminals: scrape clean if oxidised and re-tighten. ignition system damp. Battery unserviceable. Faulty carburation (bubbles vaporised fuel in circuit).FAULTS Your vehicle should not be affected by faults likely to keep it off the road for long if you have followed the Renault Servicing Programme regularly. Let the engine cool down. Battery discharged. • The engine is difficult to start when hot. • The engine is difficult to start in damp weather or after washing. Battery discharged. Terminals oxidised. or When starter is activated • There is no response.35 WWW. WS CAUSES Electronic problem. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine start-up button (see the Starting the engine information in section 2).36 . Electronic problem. • The engine is difficult to start or will not stop. • The Steering locked.FAULTS (continued) When starter is activated WWW.MANUALS. WWW. column remains Steering wheel locked.MANUALS.WS 5. Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” information in section 5: proceed as indicated for the “emergency engine stop” function. REMEDIAL ACTION Refer to the “Engine compartment fuses” information in section 5: proceed as indicated for the “emergency engine stop” function. Consult a Renault Dealer. Check tyre pressures. Mechanical defect: cylinder head gasket blown. Consult a Renault Dealer. Stop the engine. WWW. Incorrect tyre pressures. Check appropriate fuse. • Abnormal white smoke from the exhaust. If this is not the problem.FAULTS (continued) On the open road WWW.MANUALS. incorrectly balanced or damaged. faulty water pump.WS 5. • Vibrations. Engine cooling fan not working. REMEDIAL ACTION Stop the engine. have them checked by a Renault Dealer.WS CAUSES Mechanical defect: cylinder head gasket blown. • Coolant boiling in expansion bottle.37 .MANUALS. otherwise consult a Renault Dealer. • Idling unsteady or engine stalls. Oil pressure too low. Loss of oil pressure.is slow to go out or remains lit up on acceleration. . (spark plugs.MANUALS. Faulty spark plugs Change element. Check fuel level.on idling . Clogged air filter.when cornering or braking .38 WWW. air leak).WS CAUSES Short circuit Coolant circuit fault REMEDIAL ACTION Stop. • The oil pressure warning light lights up: . Top up the oil. Oil level too low.WS Poor compression ignition. disconnect the battery. Consult a Renault Dealer. Stop: call for assistance from Renault Dealer. Consult the nearest Renault Dealer. • Engine loses power. Consult a Renault Dealer.MANUALS. WWW. turn the ignition off. Consult a Renault Dealer. Fuel supply faulty. 5.FAULTS (continued) On the open road • Smoke under the bonnet. FAULTS (continued) On the open road WWW.MANUALS.WS CAUSES Belt broken. Lack of oil in pump. REMEDIAL ACTION Have the belt replaced. Top up the oil (see maintenance section). If the problem persists, consult a Renault Dealer. • Steering becomes hard to turn. • The engine overheats. The coolant temperature indicator light lights up (or the gauge needle moves into the red zone). Water pump: belt stretched or broken. Faulty engine cooling fan. Stop the vehicle and switch off the engine. Consult a Renault Dealer. Coolant leaks. Check the condition of hoses and clips. Check the expansion bottle: it should contain coolant. If it does not, top it up (having let it cool down). Take care not to scald yourself. This action is only temporary: consult your Renault Dealer as soon as possible. Radiator: Never fill a hot radiator with cold coolant if a considerable quantity has been lost. After any operation on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved by Renault's Technical Department may be used for this purpose. WWW.MANUALS.WS 5.39 FAULTS (continued) Electrical equipment WWW.MANUALS.WS CAUSES Wiper blades stuck. Fuse blown (intermittent, park). Motor faulty. REMEDIAL ACTION • The wipers do not work. Free blades before use. Replace fuse. Consult a Renault Dealer. • Indicators flash more rapidly. - Bulb blown. Replace the bulb. • Direction indicators not flashing. On one side: - Bulb blown. - Feed wire disconnected or connector out of position. - Faulty earth connection. Replace bulb. Reconnect wire. Find earth wire and remake a good clean wire-to-earth connection. On both sides: WWW.MANUALS.WS - Fuse blown. - Flasher unit defective. Replace fuse. Replace: consult a Renault Dealer. 5.40 FAULTS (continued) Electrical equipment • Headlights not working. WWW.MANUALS.WS CAUSES One: - Bulb blown. -Wire disconnected or connector out of position. - Faulty earth connection. REMEDIAL ACTION Replace bulb. Check and connector. See above. reconnect wire or Both: - If circuit is fused: Check fuse and change if necessary. • Traces of condensation in the lights. This is not a fault. The presence of traces of condensation in lights is a natural phenomenon linked to the variations in temperature. These traces will disappear rapidly once the lights are switched on. WWW.MANUALS.WS 5.41 WWW.MANUALS.WS WWW.MANUALS.WS 5.42 05 .2 dCi BG0F BG09 Engine type (see engine plate) Bore x Stroke (mm) Capacity (cc) Type of fuel K4M F4R F5R L7X F9Q turbo G9T turbo 79.0 IDE BG0H BG0N BG0P 3.WS 1.7×93 1 998 87×82.5 2 946 80×93 1 870 87×92 2 188 Unleaded petrol Diesel Spark plugs WWW. Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may damage the engine.9 dCi BG0E BG0G BG0R BG07 BG08 2. The type should be marked on a label stuck inside the engine compartment.WS Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehicle’s engine.8 16V BG0B BG0C BG0J BG0M BG0V BG04 BG05 BG06 F4P 2.0 16V BG0W BG0K BG0O BG0S BG03 2. – 6.MANUALS.ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Versions Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) WWW. If it is not then contact your Renault Dealer.5×80.6 16V BG0A BG0L BG0U 1.5 82.7×83 1 598 1 783 82.0 V6 BG0D BG0Y BG01 BG02 1.MANUALS. BG0J BG0M . permissible towing weight unbraked Max.MANUALS..BG04 . WWW. permissible axle weight Max.8 16V BG0B . boat.06 .WS Max.BG0K Automatic 1 280 800 480 1 315 830 485 WWW.WS 6. in particular. permissible load on roof rack (1) Towing weight (towing a caravan.BG0L .BG0V Automatic 1 280 800 480 1 070 1 030 1 900 1 865 1 900 1 315 830 485 2.BG0U Automatic Kerb weight Total Front Rear Front Rear 1 835 1 885 1 865 650 1 300 950 2 800 950 2 850 900 2 800 75 80 (including the carrying equipment) 950 2 850 900 2 800 950 2 850 1 270 780 490 1 300 810 490 1. those laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. permissible all-up weight Max. Consult your Renault Dealer about any towing equipment. likely to change in the course of the model year. etc.BG05 BG06 . permissible all-up weight plus weight towed) be exceeded.MANUALS.WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options. Petrol versions Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) 1. Consult your Renault Dealer.) It is important to comply with the towing weights governed by local legislation in each country and.6 16V BG0A .BG0C .0 16V BG0W .Under no circumstances may the total train weight (= Maximum. permissible all-up weight and trailer) Permissible nose weight Max. permissible towing weight braked (1) driver only other cases Total train weight (= Max. .MANUALS.If your vehicle is already at full load (maximum.0 IDE BG0H .07 . likely to change in the course of the model year depending on the country of marketing Consult your Renault Dealer. the maximum speed must be limited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.0 16V BG0O Automatic 1 295 810 485 1 330 840 490 1 320 840 480 1 070 1 030 1 880 1 915 1 905 1 925 650 1 300 900 2 800 900 2 850 900 2 850 950 2 875 75 80 (including the carrying equipment) .2 bar.WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options.BG0N . 2.WS WWW.BG03 Automatic 1 340 855 485 1 300 815 485 2. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10% at an altitude of 1000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1000 metres thereafter.MANUALS.WS 6. permissible all-up weight).The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude.BG0P Automatic 1 320 835 485 1 430 945 485 1 135 1 030 1 995 BG0D BG0Y Automatic 1 445 955 490 3. 900 2 800 900 2 850 1 500 1 150 3 150 1 885 1 910 1 980 BG0S .0 V6 BG01 BG02 WWW. BG07 Automatic Kerb weight Total Front Rear Front Rear 1 935 1 350 865 485 1 315 830 485 1 070 1 030 1 880 1 930 650 1 500 1 150 3 100 3 050 3 100 75 80 (including the carrying equipment) 3 200 1 100 2 040 1 345 855 490 1 490 980 510 1 190 1 030 2 070 2. Consult your Renault Dealer.MANUALS.2 dCi BG0F . permissible axle weight Max.BG09 Automatic 1 520 1 010 510 WWW.MANUALS.WS 6.9 dCi BG0E BG0E .08 . permissible all-up weight and trailer) Permissible nose weight Max. permissible load on roof rack WWW. likely to change in the course of the model year. permissible all-up weight Max. permissible towing weight braked (1) driver only other cases Total train weight (= Max.BG0R BG07 . Diesel versions Vehicle type (see vehicle identification plate) BG0G . permissible towing weight unbraked Max.WEIGHT (in kg) Basic vehicle without options.BG08 1.WS Max. MANUALS. permissible all-up weight and weight towed) be exceeded. WWW.If your vehicle is already at full load (max.) . Under no circumstances may the total train weight (= max. permissible all-up weight). Consult your Renault Dealer about any attachments.MANUALS. boat. . .WS 6.The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude.It is important to comply with the towing weights governed by local legislation in each country and in particular laid down in the Road Traffic Regulations. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10% at an altitude of 1000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1000 metres thereafter.09 .WS WWW.WEIGHTS (continued) (1) Towing weight (towing a caravan. the maximum speed must be limited to 60mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0. etc.2 bar. WWW. If you always fit Renault genuine parts to your vehicle.MANUALS.10 . you will ensure that it performs well.Replacement parts and repairs Original Renault parts are based on a strict specification and are regularly tested. Repairs carried out using original parts in the Renault network are guaranteed for one year.WS 6. Therefore.MANUALS.WS WWW. they are of at least the same level of quality as the originally fitted part. ..........................................19 1..........................11 .......... Dipstick ......................27 4.................................................................... 1.............................................30 5................. 2........ 1......... 1..02 5......11 2..............................13 1......22 1.............. Air conditioning .................10 1.........1..................................WS 2........29 Fog lights ..84 Front seat adjustment with: Electrical controls .............................30 .....................45 ........24 2.......................15 6......24 5.......25 Bonnet ..........14 3......05 Ashtrays ...03 2.......... Child restraint system .34 .........34 Child safety ......41 1.................... 1...12 4....09 3..............................83 2..............3.... 1.....................................................35 Filter: Air filter ..11 ....05 2............34 1.. 2.................................. Brief overview .....................02 Brake fluid ..................41 4.......... 2.......11 0................................. Engine specifications . Audible and visual warnings ............... 4.......................... Cruise control ..................25 3.......... Engine oil change ...............30 5.......................02 E Electronic stability program: ESP ...... 1......... 1........ Driving ........ 2...1..............................................MANUALS........................27 Front seats (adjustment) .34 2.......25 1.....08 6.19 2.......................08 4........ External lighting and signals .......20 .21 5..................................41 3......................................34 1...............................82 2........33 2..............................................23 3................................................04 5.34 5................................... 1........... Engine oil capacity ....................78 1............ 4.....03 1.. 3..ALPHABETICAL INDEX A ABS ........1................................09 Bulbs ..............1....13 1..............25 Cruise control ......................16 4..........................18 Emergency brake assist .................... 1............28 WWW....49 1. ESP: Electronic stability program .................3....02 Airbag (deactivating passenger airbag) .....02 Environment ...................04 .46 Driver's seat memory ..1..................................... 3.............06 3.40 Airbag .............07 Dimensions .................... 1.....30 2..................22 2.....10 C Catalytic converter .09 Doors/tailgate lid ...............................15 Engine oil ............. Bulbs (changing) ...... 3...... 1..18 Exterior temperature ............85 5........................................................................32 Automatic gearbox selector lever ................ 2...........22 WWW..............20 ........ Engine starter/stop button .......45 3.............................12 ...22 Anti-pollution (advice) ..........WS ................................31 1...30 3...........45 1......................... 3........................................07 Windscreen ................ 2.................. Clock ............ Changing a wheel ..................... Adjusting your driving position .08 4........... 5........................ Additional headlights . 2.02 6..............23 2................. 5. Automatic gearbox (use) ...........................05 1..32 B Battery ... Oil filter ....04 ... Controls ... 2....................19 3...............17 1.......21 Manual controls ..............................83 F Faults (operating faults) .................... Front seat belt pretensioners . Emergency spare wheel .07 1...................................... 1............ 1. 1.19 1..3.............. 2..... Courtesy mirrors .............. 1.....08 5..................................49 4....................................................40 Demisting: Rear screen ....... 2....................22 Accessories ......30 D Dashboard ..............5.21 Cigarette lighter ... 2.... 1..........04 4.........................46 Coolant ... Engine immobiliser ............46 Deactivating front passenger airbags .............. 4......... 1....34 2...................03 4..........................................34 1. 5............ Engine (technical specifications) . Fitting a radio ........14 Driver’s position ......speed limiter ............14 3...............27 Anti-lock braking system .......................................21 Children .......... 1..........09 Buzzer (lights on) ...................21 1....................MANUALS.............3.................................................................23 5..................78 1..........................04 Air vents ........................................................................... 5..........05 Door locking ...................05 1......49 1......36 1............................................. .... Heating ...75 5...........................04 Map reading lights ............03 1........................... 2............10 adjusting .....35 5................................14 4....................89 Fuel economy .14 1....... 2....5.......89 Fuses ....................50 1............50 Fuel tank capacity ............ 5.......... instrument panel ...........90 5..85 3.......... 2.50 Indicators ........75 Indicators: direction indicators .......................06 Gear lever ....... 3........5.......... 1....... Hubcaps ..11 5..................07 1........21 O Operating faults ......03 5...13 Paintwork (reference) ....82 5....5..........82 1.......................... 1................... Hazard warning lights .................................................................02 2........ 1....5. 5........................................... 2..................90 2................ 2......19 5......36 3.....13 1..22 WWW........MANUALS.................................02 Luggage compartment ....................................5................05 Lifting the vehicle (changing a wheel) ... Headlights ........82 ....89 Fuel level .... 1......12 Instruments ....15 1.....................83 ...................... 3.... Locking the doors ..........50 Interior lights .........................................................................2....31 4...02 Indicator lights ........14 dipped beam headlights .................................................................84 ........................09 Heated seats ............5............. Mechanics ...... Lighting: exterior .............. main beam headlights . Lights: brake lights ...................................................................... 1................13 hazard warning lights ...17 Headlights (adjusting) .. 5...10 direction indicator lights ........12 3...... 1................20 3.... 3.. 1...10 number plate lights ..........................16 5.......28 I Ignition switch ................... 3.... 4..............82 1.14 fog lights ......90 ......................................... Power assisted steering ..28 1...85 5............................. 1............11 5....08 Fuel filler cap .........................10 4....................... 2. 4.....02 4..............................5....ALPHABETICAL INDEX F Fuel (economy advice) .............83 interior ..................... 4................... Practical advice ...................90 1..89 Fuel (grade) ............41 WWW...... 3...........................15 1................ 1.07 2...............................3...................05 5..........................................1.... 5.......................... 4.............................05 Fuel (filling) ......28 . 5.............. reversing lights .MANUALS.....18 1... 1....................... 5..........06 ..............75 5.................WS ..........10 .......................... 1.........08 Puncture ............................................. 3....83 ..1.............................27 instrument panel ............14 6..5..........03 P Paintwork (maintenance) ..........................................24 G Gear (changing) ....................27 ......... 1................WS J Jack .................04 Hubcap spanner .10 2.................................... Head rest .....75 ...12 5....... 1..... 1........39 M Maintenance: Bodywork .........................16 5..........1....................14 3.............................. Levels ................15 5..... 2...... 1..................................5...85 1...83 ....07 Power assisted steering pump ............. Power steering ..........5...1............. 1...............................31 H Handbrake ................. 1........................................05 .13 Interior trim .............82 ...........38 4.10 ..15 4................29 3..........................10 5..........12 ...............16 5.................................................................................................................04 L Lashing rings ....27 - 4....................... 2.........83 1.17 2........................06 Glove box .......10 .... side lights ... Parking assistance .......... .. RENAULT Card: use .........................02 ...............04 ....................20 Transporting objects in the luggage compartment Trip computer .........5......25 2.....................................................33 .............3............................ 6....................32 Towing weights ............. 2. Windscreen wipers (blades) ...............................77 1....................... 5........02 Vehicle identification plates ......0...............09 6..09 5.......37 3............... 0. Running in .. Coolant .......12 6.21 3.................................. Technical specifications .........................................05 Speakers (location) ......03 Steering wheel (adjusting) ......80 Renault Card: battery ...........23 3.........MANUALS..........27 Starting the engine .17 ......... 3.....................................................03 6........32 Towing (towing a caravan) .2...........35 3..03 .................MANUALS................... 6......09 5..................... Wipers ................14 1.......06 2.................... Rear parcel shelf ..3.... 5............03 ... Wiper blades ..06 Voice synthesiser ..18 5..................06 Traction control system ..72 Tyre pressure .......................................31 5........................................ 5........................1............39 1........... 1............................................. 5.. 1................. 3.......79 Storage compartments ............ 0....09 1...........86 3....29 Radio installation ................0.........08 2...11 Towing (breakdown) ..............................10 WWW.................. Vehicle identification ....................................... 1........02 4.............2.29 3...................29 ...........................................11 4...................................... 3... Replacing bulbs .....06 V Variable power assisted steering ......................... 3........................... Rear window (demisting) ..................14 6..... 1... Wheels (safety) .......... 6...... 2............ Towing a caravan .......................03 3..........30 Speed limiter ..... 5......5....................05 .............06 Wheelbrace ......... 1................... 6...................................... 1..........................24 Sunroof .........................................38 Sun visor .09 2... 6........26 Side repeaters ................35 3..................................................................... 3..03 5.......26 T Tanks: Brake fluid ..................................... 1......................................07 2.....................................................89 4...............33 5.......12 4.............................. 5........07 Rear-view mirrors ..75 5...17 5..... 2............................23 1.....25 .........2... 1..............17 1...........02 Replacement parts .......16 Spare key .................07 6.06 Window winder ..20 Windscreen .......12 Tyres ...3...81 5....21 2...................86 Washing .....12 2.......04 .................................................................. Rear seats (operation) .06 Towing rings ............................05 ..............12 2...............76 W Warning display .........................17 Tyre pressure monitor ............08 3...................................28 1...3....... 1....................................02 T Temperature regulation .................88 S Seat belts ................WS ...........34 6......... 6......... 3.................. 5...................23 5...................................WS 5...33 6. 2.71 4....................29 Rear bench seat .31 1.30 5.. Windscreen washer reservoir .................. 1..02 ....................30 3......02 Ventilation ................ 5.............66 1........ Fuel tank (capacity) ..... 4............. WWW............. 3........13 Weights .............09 Reverse gear (selecting) .......10 5.88 Washers ..........................ALPHABETICAL INDEX R Radio (pre-fitting) ................ MANUALS.MANUALS.WS .WS WWW.WWW. MANUALS.WWW.WS .WS WWW.MANUALS. WS The driver's handbook — 82 00 268 996 — NU 633-6 — April 2002 — Edition anglaise .MANUALS.MANUALS.WS CRÉATEUR D'AUTOMOBILES WWW.WWW.